@namespace "http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"; body { background-color: #111; color: #eee; max-width: 50em; margin: auto; position: relative; } dl { margin: 0; } details:not([open]) summary dl { display: flex; width: calc(100% - 10em); } details:not([open]) summary .field { display: none; } details:not([open]) summary .field.Mode, details:not([open]) summary .field.Sequence, details:not([open]) summary .field.Sequences { order: 0; flex: auto; display: block; } details:not([open]) summary .field.Mnemonic { width: 10em; position: absolute; right: 0; text-align: right; display: block; } details:not([open]) summary .field.Description { order: 1; flex: auto; text-align: right; display: block; } details:not([open]) summary dt { display: none; } .field.Mnemonic dd { font-weight: bold; } .field.Mode dd, .field.Sequence dd, .field.Sequences dd { font-family: monospace; } dt { display: inline; } dt::after { content: ": " } dd { display: inline; margin: 0; } summary { list-style-position: outside; } kbd { font-weight: bold; color: #fca; } var { color: #8f8; } .sep { color: white; background-color: black; } .ctrl { border: 1px solid; margin: -1px; /* compensate for border */ border-radius: 0.3em; } # This file is hoped to document all the escape sequences supported by # terminals that are vaguely compliant with ECMA-48 and friends. # Changes should be submitted to <bjh21@bjh21.me.uk> # It includes everything from: # <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt> 1999-05-16 # <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt> # 1993-02-01 # <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>1998-09-18 # <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt> # 1999-05-16 # <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt> 1999-10-12 # <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt> # 1999-11-13 # ECMA-48 5th Ed. control functions (section 8.3, annex F) # Linux console_codes(4) # SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) # UnixWare 7 display(7) # IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G) # VT220 Reference manual (<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/>, EK-VT220-RM) # <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html> 1999-11-24 # <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html> 1999-12-01 # <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9> (wy75) # 1999-07-19 # <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip#TERM-EMU.DOC> # 1999-09-13 # <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm> 1999-04-19 # <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm> 2004-09-27 # <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm> 2004-09-27 # <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm> 1999-04-19 # <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm> 2001-05-10 # iBCS2 description in ESR's termtypes.master version 10.2.7 # Reflection Terminal Reference Manual for ADDS, ANSI, DG, VT, WYSE, and # Unisys Hosts; Version 7.0; September 1998; published by WRQ Inc. # DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 (Appendices C, E, and G) # OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW) # X Consortium Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1 # <https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/contents.html> 2020-10-28 C0 controlsSequenceNUL (^@)MnemonicNULDescriptionNull NUL is used for media-fill or time-fill. NUL characters may be inserted into, or removed from, a data stream without affecting the information content of that stream, but such action may affect the information layout and/or the control of equipment. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.98StatusstandardSequenceSOH (^A)MnemonicSOHDescriptionStart of heading SOH is used to indicate the beginning of a heading. The use of SOH is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.127Statusstandard Also used as a prefix for "UnixWindows" commands. Source<URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>Status??? privateSequenceSTX (^B)MnemonicSTXDescriptionStart of text STX is used to indicate the beginning of a text and the end of a heading. The use of STX is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.146StatusstandardSequenceETX (^C)MnemonicETXDescriptionEnd of text ETX is used to indicate the end of a text. The use of ETX is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.50StatusstandardSequenceEOT (^D)MnemonicEOTDescriptionEnd of transmission EOT is used to indicate the conclusion of the transmission of one or more texts. The use of EOT is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.45StatusstandardSequenceENQ (^E)MnemonicENQDescriptionEnquiry ENQ is transmitted by a sender as a request for a response from a receiver. The use of ENQ is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.44StatusstandardSequenceACK (^F)MnemonicACKDescriptionAcknowledge ACK is transmitted by a receiver as an affirmative response to the sender. The use of ACK is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.1StatusstandardSequenceBEL (^G)MnemonicBELDescriptionBell BEL is used when there is a need to call for attention; it may control alarm or attention devices. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.3StatusstandardSequenceBS (^H)MnemonicBSDescriptionBack space BS causes the active data position to be moved one character position in the data component in the direction opposite to that of the implicit movement. The direction of the implicit movement depends on the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.5 BS (0x08, ^H) backspaces one column (but not past the beginning of the line); SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusstandardSequenceHT (^I)MnemonicHTDescriptionCharacter tabulation HT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the following character tabulation stop in the presentation component. In addition, if that following character tabulation stop has been set by TABULATION ALIGN CENTRE (TAC), TABULATION ALIGN LEADING EDGE (TALE), TABULATION ALIGN TRAILING EDGE (TATE) or TABULATION CENTRED ON CHARACTER (TCC), HT indicates the beginning of a string of text which is to be positioned within a line according to the properties of that tabulation stop. The end of the string is indicated by the next occurrence of HT or CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.60 HT (0x09, ^I) goes to the next tab stop or to the end of the line if there is no earlier tab stop; SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusstandardSequenceLF (^J)MnemonicLFDescriptionLine feed If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, LF causes the active presentation position to be moved to the corresponding character position of the following line in the presentation component. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, LF causes the active data position to be moved to the corresponding character position of the following line in the data component. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.74StatusstandardSequenceVT (^K)MnemonicVTDescriptionLine tabulation VT causes the active presentation position to be moved in the presentation component to the corresponding character position on the line at which the following line tabulation stop is set. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.161StatusstandardSequenceVT (^K)DescriptionReverse Line-feed The cursor moves up one line, remaining at the same character position on the line. If the cursor is already at the top line, nothing happens. SourceSunOS 5.7 wscons(7D)StatusSun private; clashes with ECMA-48 VTSequenceFF (^L)MnemonicFFDescriptionForm feed FF causes the active presentation position to be moved to the corresponding character position of the line at the page home position of the next form or page in the presentation component. The page home position is established by the parameter value of SET PAGE HOME (SPH). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.51StatusstandardSequenceCR (^M)MnemonicCRDescriptionCarriage return The effect of CR depends on the setting of the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) and on the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD). If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION and with the parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, CR causes the active presentation position to be moved to the line home position of the same line in the presentation component. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, CR causes the active presentation position to be moved to the line limit position of the same line in the presentation component. The line limit position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL). If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA and with a parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, CR causes the active data position to be moved to the line home position of the same line in the data component. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, CR causes the active data position to be moved to the line limit position of the same line in the data component. The line limit position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.15StatusstandardSequenceLS1 (^N)MnemonicLS1DescriptionLocking-shift one LS1 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of LS1 is defined in Standard ECMA-35. NOTE LS1 is used in 8-bit environments only; in 7-bit environments SHIFT-OUT (SO) is used instead. SourceECMA-48 8.3.76StatusstandardSequenceSO (^N)MnemonicSODescriptionShift-out SO is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of SO is defined in Standard ECMA-35. NOTE SO is used in 7-bit environments only; in 8-bit environments LOCKING-SHIFT ONE (LS1) is used instead. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.126StatusstandardSequenceLS0 (^O)MnemonicLS0DescriptionLocking-shift zero LS0 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of LS0 is defined in Standard ECMA-35. NOTE LS0 is used in 8-bit environments only; in 7-bit environments SHIFT-IN (SI) is used instead. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.75StatusstandardSequenceSI (^O)MnemonicSIDescriptionShift-in SI is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of SI is defined in Standard ECMA-35. NOTE SI is used in 7-bit environments only; in 8-bit environments LOCKING-SHIFT ZERO (LS0) is used instead. SourceECMA-35 5th Ed. 8.3.119StatusstandardSequenceDLE (^P)MnemonicDLEDescriptionData link escape DLE is used exclusively to provide supplementary transmission control functions. The use of DLE is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 8.3.33StatusstandardSequenceDC1 (^Q)MnemonicDC1DescriptionDevice control one DC1 is primarily intended for turning on or starting an ancillary device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used to restore a device to the basic mode of operation (see also DC2 and DC3), or any other device control function not provided by other DCs. NOTE When used for data flow control, DC1 is sometimes called "X-ON". SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.28StatusstandardSequenceDC2 (^R)MnemonicDC2DescriptionDevice control two DC2 is primarily intended for turning on or starting an ancillary device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used to set a device to a special mode of operation (in which case DC1 is used to restore the device to the basic mode), or for any other device control function not provided by other DCs. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.29StatusstandardSequenceDC3 (^S)MnemonicDC3DescriptionDevice control three DC3 is primarily intended for turning off or stopping an ancillary device. This function may be a secondary level stop, for example wait, pause, stand-by or halt (in which case DC1 is used to restore normal operation). If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used for any other device control function not provided by other DCs. NOTE When used for data flow control, DC3 is sometimes called "X-OFF". SourceECMA-48 8.3.30StatusstandardSequenceDC4 (^T)MnemonicDC4DescriptionDevice control four DC4 is primarily intended for turning off, stopping or interrupting an ancillary device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used for any other device control function not provided by other DCs. SourceECMA-48 8.3.31StatusstandardSequenceDC4 (^T) Used by the TDSMP (Terminal Device Session Management Protocol) on DEC VT4xx terminals. The protocol is patented (US 4791566 & 5165020). Commands seems to end with ST. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt> [paraphrased]StatusDEC privateSequenceNAK (^U)MnemonicNAKDescriptionNegative acknowledge NAK is transmitted by a receiver as a negative response to the sender. The use of NAK is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.84SequenceSYN (^V)MnemonicSYNDescriptionSynchronous idle SYN is used by a synchronous transmission system in the absence of any other character (idle condition) to provide a signal from which synchronism may be achieved or retained between data terminal equipment. The use of SYN is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.150Statusstandard Also used as an introducer for AVATAR commands Source<URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>Status??? privateSequenceETB (^W)MnemonicETBDescriptionEnd of transmission block ETB is used to indicate the end of a block of data where the data are divided into such blocks for transmission purposes. The use of ETB is defined in ISO 1745. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.49StatusstandardSequenceCAN (^X)MnemonicCANDescriptionCancel CAN is used to indicate that the data preceding it in the data stream is in error. As a result, this data shall be ignored. The specific meaning of this control function shall be defined for each application and/or between sender and recipient. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.6StatusstandardSequenceEM (^Y)MnemonicEMDescriptionEnd of medium EM is used to identify the physical end of a medium, or the end of the used portion of a medium, or the end of the wanted portion of data recorded on a medium. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.42StatusstandardSequenceSUB (^Z)MnemonicSUBDescriptionSubstitute SUB is used in the place of a character that has been found to be invalid or in error. SUB is intended to be introduced by automatic means. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.148StatusstandardSequenceESC (^[)MnemonicESCDescriptionEscape ESCAPE is a control character used for code extension purposes. It causes the meaning of a limited number of the bit combinations following it in a CC-data-element to be changed. These bit combinations, together with the preceding bit combination that represents the ESC character, constitute an escape sequence. Escape sequences provide the coded representations of code-identification functions and of some types of control functions. The various uses of escape sequences are specified in clause 13. Code identification functions are specified in clauses 14 and 15. SourceECMA-35 6th Ed. 6.2.2 An escape sequence shall consist of two or more bytes. In an 8-bit code a byte shall be an 8-bit combination. In a 7-bit code a byte shall be a 7-bit combination. The first byte of an escape sequence shall be the bit combination representing the ESCAPE character and the last shall be known as the Final Byte. An escape sequence may also contain one or more bytes known as Intermediate bytes. The function represented by an escape sequence shall be determined by its Intermediate byte(s), if any, and by its Final Byte. Intermediate bytes shall be any of the 16 positions of column 02 of the code table; they are denoted by the symbol I. Final bytes shall be any of the 79 positions of columns 03 to 07 of the code table excluding position 07/15; they are denoted by the symbol F. NOTE 40 Although, in this Standard, escape sequences are specified in terms of bytes or positions in the code table, the meaning of an escape sequence is determined only by its bit combinations and it is unaffected by any meaning assigned to those bit combinations taken individually. Bit combinations in columns 00 and 01 and the bit combination 07/15 shall not be used as either Intermediate or Final bytes to construct an escape sequence. In an 8-bit code bit combinations in columns 08 to 15 also shall not be so used. NOTE 41 As these prohibited bytes may appear in an escape sequence in error, it may be necessary within an application to provide methods of identifying such a situation and of recovering from it, but this is not covered by this Standard. SourceECMA-35 6th Ed. 13.1 [ So, in summary, that's ESC {SP-/}* {0-~} ] StatusstandardnFSequencesESC {SP-/} {SP-/}* {0-~}SequenceESC SP {0-~}MnemonicACSDescriptionAnnounce code structureSequenceESC SP 6MnemonicS8C1R (also DECAC1)DescriptionC1 receive disabled The printer receives 7-bit data and C1 control characters (as 7-bit ESC Fe sequences). This description doesn't say what the printer does when it receives an 8-bit C1 control character in DECTC1 (S7C1R) mode. The LA100 reference says that it just truncates the 8th bit of all C1 control characters received. Ouch! SourcePaul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail <384A6F50.3349DE09@rdel.co.uk>StatusstandardSequenceESC SP 7MnemonicS7C1R (also DECTC1)DescriptionC1 receive enabled The printer receives 8-bit data and C1 control characters (as 7-bit ESC Fe sequences or single 8-bit bytes). SourcePaul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail <384A6F50.3349DE09@rdel.co.uk>StatusstandardSequenceESC SP FMnemonicS7C1TDescription7-bit C1 controls The VT220 command ESC SP F (called S7C1T in the DEC documentation) tells the terminal to transmit the 7 bit equivalents for the 8 bit C1 codes to the host, both for command responses (like the response to CSI c), and for function keys which return C1 codes. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>StatusStandardSequenceESC SP GMnemonicS8C1TDescription8-bit C1 controls Likewise, ESC SP G (S8C1T) tells the terminal to transmit 8 bit C1 codes if the terminal has an 8 bit data path to the host. (The command has no effect if the host port is set to 7 bit mode.) Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>StatusStandardSequenceESC ! {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicCZDDescriptionC0-designateSequenceESC ! @DescriptionC0-designate ECMA-6 IRV C0 set SourceECMA-6 6th Ed. 9.2StatusstandardSequenceESC " {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicC1DDescriptionC1-designate3F: Single control functionsSequencesESC # {SP-/}* {0-~}SequenceESC # {SP-/} 0Descriptionignoring extensions is OK Part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding, this sequence indicates that the string that follows contains extensions beyond version 1, but that ignoring those extensions is acceptable. The intermediate character is in the range 02/00 to 02/15 and indicates the version number minus one of the specification being used. SourceCompound Text Encoding Version 1.1StatusX11 privateSequenceESC # {SP-/} 1Descriptionignoring extensions is not OK Part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding, this sequence indicates that the string that follows contains extensions beyond version 1, and that ignoring those extensions is unacceptable and would lose mandatory information. The intermediate character is in the range 02/00 to 02/15 and indicates the version number minus one of the specification being used. SourceCompound Text Encoding Version 1.1StatusX11 privateSequenceESC # 3MnemonicDECDHLTDescriptionDouble-width, double-height line (top half) These sequences cause the line containing the cursor to become the top or bottom half of a double-height, double width line. The sequences should be used in pairs on adjacent lines with each line containing the same character string. If the line was single width single height, all characters to the right of the center of the screen will be lost. The cursor remains over the same character position, unless it would be to the right of the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right margin. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC # 4MnemonicDECDHLBDescriptionDouble-width, double-height line (bottom half) These sequences cause the line containing the cursor to become the top or bottom half of a double-height, double width line. The sequences should be used in pairs on adjacent lines with each line containing the same character string. If the line was single width single height, all characters to the right of the center of the screen will be lost. The cursor remains over the same character position, unless it would be to the right of the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right margin. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC # 5MnemonicDECSWLDescriptionSingle-width, single-height line This causes the line which contains the cursor to become single-width, single-height. The cursor remains on the same character position. This is the default condition for all new lines on the screen. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC # 6MnemonicDECDWLDescriptionDouble-width, single-height line This causes the line that contains the cursor to become double-width single height. If the line was single width, all characters ro the right of the center of the screen will be lost. The cursor remains over the same character position, unless it would be to the right of the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right margin. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC # 7MnemonicDECHCPDescriptionHardcopy Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC # 8MnemonicDECALNDescriptionScreen alignment display This command causes the VT100 to fill its screen with uppercase Es for screen focus and alignment. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC # 9MnemonicDECFPPDescriptionPerform pending motion SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90StatusDEC private; LQP024F: Designation of multibyte graphic character setsSequencesESC $ {SP-/} {SP-/}* {0-~}SequenceESC $ ( {SP-/}* {0-~}DescriptionG0-designate multibyte 94-setSequenceESC $ ) {SP-/}* {0-~}DescriptionG1-designate multibyte 94-setSequenceESC $ * {SP-/}* {0-~}DescriptionG2-designate multibyte 94-setSequenceESC $ + {SP-/}* {0-~}DescriptionG3-designate multibyte 94-setSequenceESC $ - {SP-/}* {0-~}DescriptionG1-designate multibyte 96-setSequenceESC $ . {SP-/}* {0-~}DescriptionG2-designate multibyte 96-setSequenceESC $ / {SP-/}* {0-~}DescriptionG3-designate multibyte 96-setSequenceESC % {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicDOCSDescriptionDesignate other coding system 15.4.1 Purpose A code-identification function is provided to designate and invoke an identified coding system different from that of this Standard, not necessarily a character code. It provides a means for switching between coding systems according to this Standard and other coding systems when it is not performed at an outer level (e.g. 15.3). Each such other coding system is registered in the ISO International Register of Coded Character Sets (see annex B), together with a Final Byte (and where necessary one or more associated Intermediate bytes) to identify it. This function is also recommended for use by such other coding systems for returning to the coding system of this Standard, by the use of a reserved Final Byte which identifies it. NOTE 56 Other standards specify alternative methods for achieving an effect similar to that of DOCS, e.g. those based on the upper layers defined in ISO 7498 - Open Systems Interconnection, Basic Reference Model. 15.4.2 Specification Name: DESIGNATE OTHER CODING SYSTEM Acronym: DOCS Coded representation: ESC 02/05 F or ESC 02/05 I F DOCS shall designate and invoke an identified coding system. In the coded representation of DOCS the F byte (and any associated I bytes) shall identify the coding system. DOCS with Final Byte 04/00, without I byte, shall designate the coding system of this Standard. It is intended for use by other coding systems for returning to this coding system. It shall restore the state of the coding system to that at the time of invocation of the other coding system, that is the state established by announcer functions, and the designation and invocation state of graphic character and control character sets. Whether or not other states, e.g. the active position, are restored is outside the scope of this Standard. DOCS with I byte 02/15 shall mean that the other coding system does not use DOCS (F = 04/00), coded as specified here, to return (it may have an alternate means to return or none at all). It shall also mean that after such a return (if any) the previous state of this coding system (i.e. announcements, designations, and invocations) is undefined. DOCS with any other I byte, or with no I byte, shall mean that the other coding system uses DOCS (F = 04/00) to return. SourceECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4StatusstandardSequenceESC % / {SP-/}* {0-~}Descriptionswitch to a coding system which doesn't support DOCS SourceECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4.2StatusstandardSequenceESC % / 0 length charset STXDescriptionswitch to named variable-length encoding This is part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT format, and is used to escape to a character encoding not directly supported by that standard. This version is for encodings with a variable number of octets per character. "length" consists of two octets, M and L, that between them define the number of octets of data that follow to be ((M-128)*128) + (L-128). The top bits of M and L are always set. "charset" is a character set name from the X Consortium CharSet registry. STX is followed by octets encoded in that character set. "length" includes the length of the charset name and the STX. SourceCompound Text Encoding Version 1.1StatusX11 privateSequenceESC % / 1 length charset STXDescriptionswitch to named single-byte encoding The same as ESC % / 0, but with one octet per character. SourceCompound Text Encoding Version 1.1StatusX11 privateSequenceESC % / 2 length charset STXDescriptionswitch to named double-byte encoding The same as ESC % / 0, but with two octets per character. SourceCompound Text Encoding Version 1.1StatusX11 privateSequenceESC % / 3 length charset STXDescriptionswitch to named triple-byte encoding The same as ESC % / 0, but with three octets per character. SourceCompound Text Encoding Version 1.1StatusX11 privateSequenceESC % / 4 length charset STXDescriptionswitch to named quadruple-byte encoding The same as ESC % / 0, but with four octets per character. SourceCompound Text Encoding Version 1.1StatusX11 privateSequenceESC % / {5-?} lengthDescriptionbegin extended segment These sequences begin an as-yet undefined kind of extended segment in the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding. The "length" is encoded as described for ESC % / 0; the rest is undefined. SourceCompound Text Encoding Version 1.1StatusX11 privateSequenceESC % / @Descriptionswitch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 1 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / ADescriptionswitch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 1 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / BDescriptionSwitch to Virtual Terminal service Transparent Set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / CDescriptionswitch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 2 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / DDescriptionswitch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 2 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / EDescriptionswitch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 3 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / FDescriptionswitch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 3 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / GDescriptionswitch to UTF-8 Level 1 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / HDescriptionswitch to UTF-8 Level 2 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / IDescriptionswitch to UTF-8 Level 3 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / JDescriptionswitch to UTF-16 Level 1 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / KDescriptionswitch to UTF-16 Level 2 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % / LDescriptionswitch to UTF-16 Level 3 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % 8Descriptionswitch to UTF-8 SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusLinux private; obsoleteSequenceESC % @Descriptionreturn to ECMA-35 coding system SourceECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4.2StatusstandardSequenceESC % ADescriptionswitch to CSA T 500-1983 Syntax of the North American Videotex/Teletex Presentation Level Protocol (NAPLPS), CSA T 500-1983 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % BDescriptionswitch to UCS Transformation Format One (UTF-1) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % CDescriptionswitch to Data Syntax I of CCITT Rec.T.101 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % DDescriptionswitch to Data Syntax II of CCITT Rec.T.101 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % EDescriptionswitch to Photo-Videotex Data Syntax of CCITT Rec. T.101 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % FDescriptionswitch to Audio Data Syntax of CCITT Rec. T.101 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % GDescriptionswitch to UTF-8 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC % HDescriptionswitch to VEMMI Data Syntax of ITU-T Rec. T.107 Videotex Enhanced Man Machine Interface (VEMMI) Data Syntax of ITU-T Rec. T.107 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC & {0-~}MnemonicIRRDescriptionIdentify revised registrationSequenceESC ' {0-~}DescriptionReserved for future standardisationSequenceESC ( {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicGZD4DescriptionG0-designate 94-set [ NB: All character sets listed here are valid for other G?D4 sequnces too. ] SequenceESC ( ! @DescriptionG0-designate CCITT Greek Primary character set (IANA name greek-ccitt) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ! ADescriptionG0-designate Cuban character set (NC 99-10:81) (IANA name NC_NC00-10:81) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ! BDescriptionG0-designate ISO 646 invariant character set (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ! CDescriptionG0-designate Irish Gaelic character set (I.S. 433:1996) (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ! DDescriptionG0-designate Turkmen character set (Turkmen Standard TDS 565) (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ! EDescriptionG0-designate ANSEL character set (ANSI/NISO Z39.47) The ANSEL standard is used in bibliographic work. It addresses special characters in languages using the Latin alphabet as well as combining marks (diacritics) required for romanization and transliteration. In ANSEL, non-spacing characters precede the character that they modify. The MARC 21 Extended Latin character set (published by the Library of Congress) is synchronized with ANSEL. Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ! FDescriptionG0-designate Turkmen 8-bit character set (TDS 616-2003) (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( " 1DescriptionG0-designate Digital Symbol character set SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE47StatusDEC private; LA210SequenceESC ( " 4DescriptionG0-designate DEC Hebrew character set Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( " >DescriptionG0-designate Greek NRCS Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( " ?DescriptionG0-designate DEC Greek character set Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( % 0DescriptionG0-designate DEC Turkish character set Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( % 2DescriptionG0-designate Turkish NRCS Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( % 3DescriptionG0-designate SCS NRCS Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( % 5DescriptionG0-designate Digital Supplemental Graphics set SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( % 6DescriptionG0-designate Portuguese NRCS Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( % =DescriptionG0-designate Hebrew NRCS Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( & 4DescriptionG0-designate DEC Cyrillic character set Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( & 5DescriptionG0-designate Russian NRCS Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( 0DescriptionG0-designate VT100 line-drawing set Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.html>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC ( 1DescriptionG0-designate alternate character ROM (standard) Source???StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC ( 2DescriptionG0-designate alternate character ROM (graphics) Source???StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC ( 3DescriptionG0-designate HP Roman 8, upper 128 chars Sourcepcvt EscapeSequencesStatusHP private?SequenceESC ( 4DescriptionG0-designate Dutch character set Sourcevttest-990212 vt420.cStatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( 5DescriptionG0-designate Finnish character set Sourcevttest-990212 vt420.cStatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( 6DescriptionG0-designate Norwegian/Danish character set Sourcevttest-990212 vt420.cStatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( 7DescriptionG0-designate Swedish character set Sourcepcvt EscapeSequencesStatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( 8DescriptionG0-designate APL character set SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( 9DescriptionG0-designate French Canadian character set SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56StatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( <DescriptionG0-designate DEC supplemental character set Sourcehttp://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.htmlStatusDEC private; VT200SequenceESC ( =DescriptionG0-designate Swiss character set Sourcevttest-990212 vt420.cStatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( >DescriptionG0-designate DEC Technical character set Sourcepcvt EscpaeSequencesStatusDEC privateSequenceESC ( @DescriptionG0-designate ISO-646 IRV This differs from ASCII in having a currency sign in place of the dollar. (IANA name ISO_646.irv:1983) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ADescriptionG0-designate GB character set This is the ECMA-6 IRV (ASCII), with hash turned into sterling. (IANA name BS_4730) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( BDescriptionG0-designate ECMA-6 IRV (IANA name ANSI_X3.4-1968) SourceECMA-6 6th Ed. 9.2StatusstandardSequenceESC ( CDescriptionG0-designate NATS main Finnish/Swedish character set (IANA name NATS-SEFI) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( DDescriptionG0-designate NATS additional Finnish/Swedish graphic set (IANA name NATS-SEFI-ADD) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( EDescriptionG0-designate NATS main Norwegian/Danish character set (IANA name NATS-DANO) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( FDescriptionG0-designate NATS additional Norwegian/Danish character set (IANA name NATS-DANO-ADD) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( GDescriptionG0-designate Swedish basic character set (SEN 85 02 00 Annex B) (IANA name SEN_850200_B) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( HDescriptionG0-designate Swedish name-writing set (SEN 85 02 00 Annex C) (IANA name SEN_85020_C) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( IDescriptionG0-designate Katakana character set (JIS C 6220 - 1969) (IANA name JIS_C6220-1969-jp) This character set expects to be in G1 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( JDescriptionG0-designate Roman character set (JIS C 6220 - 1969) (IANA name JIS_C6220-1969-ro) This character set expects to be in G0 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( KDescriptionG0-designate German character set (DIN 66003) (IANA name DIN_66003) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( KDescriptionG0-designate user-defined character set SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusLinux private; clashes with ECMA-35SequenceESC ( LDescriptionG0-designate Portuguese character set (IANA name PT) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( MDescriptionG0-designate African character set (ISO 6438) (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( NDescriptionG0-designate basic Cyrillic character set (ISO 5427) (IANA name ISO_5427) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ODescriptionG0-designate bibliographic extension character set (DIN 31624) (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( PDescriptionG0-designate bibliographic extension character set (ISO 5426:1980) (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( QDescriptionG0-designate cyrillic bibliographic extension set (ISO 5427:1981) (IANA name ISO_5427:1981) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( QDescriptionG0-designate French Canadian character set Sourcevttest-990212 vt420.cStatusDEC private?; clashes with ECMA-35SequenceESC ( RDescriptionG0-designate French character set (NF Z 62-010 (1973)) (IANA name NF_Z_62-010_(1973)) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( SDescriptionG0-designate Greek bibliographic character set (ISO 5428:1980) (IANA name ISO_5428:1980) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( TDescriptionG0-designate Chinese latin character set (GB 1988 80) (IANA name GB_1988-80) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( UDescriptionG0-designate Latin-Greek character set (Honeywell-Bull) (IANA name Latin-greek1) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( UDescriptionG0-designate PC console character set SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusLinux private; clashes with ECMA-35SequenceESC ( VDescriptionG0-designate UK Videotex/Teletext character set (IANA name BS_viewdata) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( WDescriptionG0-designate ISO 646 subset for INIS (IANA name INIS) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( XDescriptionG0-designate Greek bibliographic character set (ISO 5428) (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( YDescriptionG0-designate Italian character set (IANA name IT) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ZDescriptionG0-designate Spanish character set (IANA name ES) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( [DescriptionG0-designate Greek character set (IANA name greek7-old) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( \DescriptionG0-designate Latin/Greek character set (IANA name latin-greek) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ]DescriptionG0-designate INIS non-standard extension character set (IANA name INIS-8) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ^DescriptionG0-designate INIS Cyrillic extension character set (IANA name INIS-cyrillic) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( _DescriptionG0-designate CODAR-U Arabic character set (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( `DescriptionG0-designate Norwegian/Danish character set (NS 4551) (IANA name NS_4551-1) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( aDescriptionG0-designate Norwegian character set (NS 4551 version 2) (IANA name NS_4551-2) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( bDescriptionG0-designate supplementary Videotex character set (IANA name videotex-suppl) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( cDescriptionG0-designate Videotex mosaic character set (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( dDescriptionG0-designate seccond Videotex mosaic character set (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( eDescriptionG0-designate APL character set (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( fDescriptionG0-designate French character set (NF Z 62-010 (1982)) (IANA name NF_Z_60-010) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( gDescriptionG0-designate Portuguese character set (IBM) (IANA name PT2) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( hDescriptionG0-designate Spanish character set (IBM) (IANA name ES2) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( iDescriptionG0-designate Hungarian character set (MSZ 7795/3) (IANA name MSZ_7795.3) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( jDescriptionG0-designate Greek character set (ELOT) (IANA name greek7) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( kDescriptionG0-designate Arabic character set (ASMO 449, ISO 9036) (IANA name ASMO_449) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( lDescriptionG0-designate Latin supplementary character set (ISO 6937/2) (IANA name iso-ir-90) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( mDescriptionG0-designate Japanese OCR-A character set (JIS C 6229-1984) (IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-a) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( nDescriptionG0-designate Japanese OCR-B character set (JIS C 6229-1984) (IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-b) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( oDescriptionG0-designate Japanese addition OCR-B set (JIS C 6229-1984) (IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-b-add) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( pDescriptionG0-designate Japanese hand-printed OCR set (JIS C 6229-1984) (IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-hand) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( qDescriptionG0-designate Japanese hand-printed OCR additional set (IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-hand-add) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( rDescriptionG0-designate Katakana hand-printed OCR set (JIS C 6229-1984) (IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-kana) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( sDescriptionG0-designate E13B character set (ISO 2033-1983) (IANA name ISO_2033-1983) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( tDescriptionG0-designate supplemetary Teletext character set (ANSI X3.110) (IANA name ANSI_X3.110-1983) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( uDescriptionG0-designate Teletext character set (CCITT T.61) (IANA name T.61-7bit) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( vDescriptionG0-designate Teletext supplementary character set (CCITT T.61) (IANA name T.61-8bit) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( wDescriptionG0-designate Canadian character set 1 (CSA Z243.4 - 1985) (IANA name CSA_Z243.4-1985-1) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( xDescriptionG0-designate Canadian character set 2 (CSA Z243.4 - 1985) (IANA name (CSA_Z243.4-1985-2) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( yDescriptionG0-designate CCITT T.101 Data Syntax I mosaic set (no IANA name) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( zDescriptionG0-designate Serbocroatian/Slovenian character set (JUS I.B1.002) (IANA name JUS_I.B1.002) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( {DescriptionG0-designate Serbocroatian Cyrillic character set (JUS I.B1.003) (IANAN name JUS_I.B1.003-serb) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( |DescriptionG0-designate CCITT T.101 Data Syntax III (IANA name T.101-G2) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( }DescriptionG0-designate Macedonian Cyrillic charcter set (JUS I.B1.004) (IANA name JUS_I.B1.003-mac) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC ( ~DescriptionG0-designate empty character set The Final Byte 07/14 shall be reserved to identify the empty set of each type, i.e. the set that does not contain any character. If an empty set is designated the bit combinations corresponding to the code table positions of the set shall not be used, i.e. the (non-existent) characters shall not be invoked. SourceECMA-35 6th Ed. 14.1StatusstandardSequenceESC ) {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicG1D4DescriptionG1-designate 94-set See GZD4 for character sets SequenceESC * {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicG2D4DescriptionG2-designated 94-set See GZD4 for character sets SequenceESC + {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicG3D4DescriptionG3-designate 94-set See GZD4 for character sets SequenceESC , {0-~}Descriptionreserved for future standardisationSequenceESC - {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicG1D6DescriptionG1-designate 96-setSequenceESC - <DescriptionG1-designate User-preferred supplemental character set Sourcehttps://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCS.htmlStatusDEC privateSequenceESC - @DescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin/Cyrillic set (ECMA-113, 1st ed.) (IANA name ECMA-cyrillic) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - ADescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-1 character set (ISO 8859-1:1987) (IANA name ISO_8859-1:1987) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - BDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-2 character set (ISO 8859-2:1987) (IANA name ISO_8859-2:1987) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - CDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-3 character set (ISO 8859-3:1988) (IANA name ISO_8859-3:1988) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - DDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-4 character set (ISO 8859-4:1988) (IANA name ISO_8859-4:1988) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - EDescriptionG1-designate Supplementary Graphic Set (CSA Z243.4-1985) (IANA name CSA_Z243.4-1985-gr) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - FDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin/Greek set (ISO 8859-7:1987) (IANA name ISO_8859-7:1987) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - GDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin/Arabic set (ISO 8859-6:1987) (IANA name ISO_8859-6:1987) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - HDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set (ISO 8859-8:1988) (IANA name ISO_8859-8:1988) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - IDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Czechoslovak set (CSN 369103) (IANA name CSN_369103) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - JDescriptionG1-designate Latin supplementary set (ISO 6937-2:1983) (IANA name ISO_6937-2-add) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - KDescriptionG1-designate technical character set (IANA name IEC_P27-1) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - LDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin/Cyrillic set (ISO 8859-5:1988) (IANA name ISO_8859-5:1988) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - MDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-5 character set (ISO 8859-9:1989) (IANA name ISO_8859-9:1989) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - NDescriptionG1-designate ISO 6937-2:1983 residual set (IANA name ISO_6937-2-add) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - ODescriptionG1-designate basic Cyrillic character set (GOST 19768-74) (IANA name GOST_19768-74) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - PDescriptionG1-designate Latin-1/2/5 supplemental set (IANA name ISO_8859-supp) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - QDescriptionG1-designate basic box-drawing set (ISO/IEC 10367) (IANA name ISO_10367-box) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - RDescriptionG1-designate ISO/IEC 6937:1992 supplementary set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - SDescriptionG1-designate CCITT Hebrew supplementary set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - TDescriptionG1-designate Thai character set (TIS 620-2533 (1990)) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - UDescriptionG1-designate Arabic/French/German set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - VDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-6 character set (ISO 8859-10:1992) (IANA name ISO-8859-10) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - XDescriptionG1-designate Sami supplementary set (for use with Latin-6) (IANA name latin-lap) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - YDescriptionG1-designate Baltic rim supplementary set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - ZDescriptionG1-designate RH half of VISCII-2 (TCVN 5712:1993) (IANA name VISCII) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - [DescriptionG1-designate IEC technical character set 1 (IEC P1289) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - \DescriptionG1-desgnate RH part of Latin-1 Welsh variant Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - ]DescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-1 Sami variant Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - ^DescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - _DescriptionG1-designate RH part of Celtic set (ISO 8859-14:1998) (IANA name ISO-8859-14) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - `DescriptionG1-designate Uralic supplementary Cyrillic set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - aDescriptionG1-designate Volgaic supplementary Cyrillic set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - bDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-9 character set Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - cDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-1 set with Euro sign Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - dDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-4 set with Euro sign Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - eDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin-7 set with Euro sign Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - fDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Romanian character set (SR 14111:1998) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - gDescriptionG1-designate Ogham character set (IS 434:1997) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - iDescriptionG1-designate Sami supplementary set no 2 Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - jDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin/Greek set (ISO/IEC 8859-7:2003) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - kDescriptionG1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set (SI1311:2002) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC - }DescriptionG1-designate supplementary mosaic set (CCITT T.101) Source<URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>StatusstandardSequenceESC . {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicG2D6DescriptionG2-designate 96-set See G1D6 for character sets SequenceESC / {SP-/}* {0-~}MnemonicG3D6DescriptionG3-designate 96-set See G1D6 for character sets Fp: private control functionsSequencesESC {0-?}SequenceESC 1DescriptionGraphics proc. option on Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC 1MnemonicDECHTSDescriptionHorizontal tab set Sets horizontal tab stop at active column SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10StatusDEC private; DECwriter, LA100SequenceESC 2DescriptionGraphics proc. option off Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC 2MnemonicDECCAHTDescriptionClear all horizontal tabs Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>StatusDEC private; DECwriterSequenceESC 3MnemonicDECVTSDescriptionVertical tab set Sets vertical tab stop at active line SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE11StatusDEC private; printersSequenceESC 4MnemonicDECCAVTDescriptionClear all vertical tabs Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>StatusDEC private; DECwriterSequenceESC 5MnemonicDECXMITDescriptionTransmit character at cursor Source<URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceESC 6DescriptionBackward indexMnemonicDECBI /* * VT400 & up. * DECBI - Back Index * This control function moves the cursor backward one column. If the cursor * is at the left margin, then all screen data within the margin moves one * column to the right. The column that shifted past the right margin is lost. * * Format: ESC 6 * Description* DECBI adds a new column at the left margin with no visual attributes. DECBI * is not affected by the margins. If the cursor is at the left border of the * page when the terminal received DECBI, then the terminal ignores DECBI. */ Sourcevttest-990212 vt420.cStatusDEC private; VT400SequenceESC 7MnemonicDECSCDescriptionSave cursor Saves the following items in the terminal's memory: Cursor position Character attributes set by the SGR command Character sets (G0, G1, G2, or G3) currently in GL and GR Wrap flag (autowrap or no autowrap) State of origin mode (DECOM) Selective erase attribute Any single shift 2 (SS2) or single shift 3 (SS3) functions sent Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSC.html>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC 8MnemonicDECRCDescriptionRestore Cursor Restores the states described for (DECSC) above. If none of these characteristics were saved: the cursor moves to home position, origin mode is reset, no character attributes are assigned, and the default character set mapping is established. Source<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC 9MnemonicDECFIDescriptionForward index /* * VT400 & up. * * DECFI - Forward Index * This control function moves the column forward one column. If the cursor is * at the right margin, then all screen data within the margins moves one * column to the left. The column shifted past the left margin is lost. * * Format: ESC 9 * Description* DECFI adds a new column at the right margin with no visual attributes. * DECFI is not affected by the margins. If the cursor is at the right border * of the page when the terminal receives DECFI, then the terminal ignores * DECFI. */ Sourcevttest-990212 vt420.cStatusDEC private; VT400SequenceESC =MnemonicDECKPAMDescriptionKeypad application mode The auxiliary keypad keys will transmit control sequences. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC >MnemonicDECKPNMDescriptionKeypad numeric mode The auxiliary keypad keys will send ASCII codes corresponding to the characters engraved on their keys. Source<URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceESC Q Fn stringMnemonicSCODFKDescriptionDefine Function Key Programs function key to send a defined string in SCO Console mode. Parameters Fn is an ASCII code representing the function key being defined. F1, the first key, is represented by "0"; each following key has an ASCII value that increments 1 from the previous key's ASCII value as follows: Key Function Key Fn ASCII Character 1 - 12 F1 through F12 0 - ; 13 - 24 Shift/F1 through Shift/F12 < - G 25 - 36 Ctrl/F1 through Ctrl/F12 H - S 37 - 48 Ctrl/Shift/F1 through Ctrl/Shift/F12 T - _ 49 Kpd 7 ` 50 Kpd 8 a 51 Kpd 9 b 52 Kpd - c 53 Kpd 4 d 54 Kpd 5 e 55 Kpd 6 f 56 Kpd + g 57 Kpd 1 h 58 Kpd 2 i 59 Kpd 3 j 60 Kpd 0 k String is the programmed key definition which is enveloped by two characters as the delimiters. Description The first character after the ASCII character representing a function key becomes the delimiter. It looks for an identical character as the second and final delimiter. If string is too long and no memory is available, then the command string is aborted and remaining characters are displayed on screen. The character becomes the final character. All the following characters are displayed on the screen. A "^" character causes any following character to subtract 32 from its ASCII value. For example, "^e" in the string sends "E" when the key is pressed. Any code in the 00-7F region can be defined. An 8-bit code entered is stripped of its eighth bit and defined as a corresponding 7-bit code. The maximum string length for a defined key is 255 characters. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/SCODFK.html>StatusSCO privateSequenceESC ZMnemonicDECIDDescriptionIdentify terminal This sequence causes the same response as the DA sequence. This sequence will not be supported in future models. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100; clashes with ECMA-48Fs: Standardized single control functionsSequencesESC ` to ESC ~SequenceESC `MnemonicDMIDescriptionDisable manual input DMI causes the manual input facilities of a device to be disabled. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.34StatusstandardSequenceESC aMnemonicINTDescriptionInterrupt INT is used to indicate to the receiving device that the current process is to be interrupted and an agreed procedure is to be initiated. This control function is applicable to either direction of transmission. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.68StatusstandardSequenceESC bMnemonicEMIDescriptionEnable manual input EMI is used to enable the manual input facilities of a device. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.43StatusstandardSequenceESC cMnemonicRISDescriptionReset to initial state RIS causes a device to be reset to its initial state, i.e. the state it has after it is made operational. This may imply, if applicable: clear tabulation stops, remove qualified areas, reset graphic rendition, put all character positions into the erased state, move the active presentation position to the first position of the first line in the presentation component, move the active data position to the first character position of the first line in the data component, set the modes into the reset state, etc. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.105 (DEC) replaces all terminal set-up parameters with NVR values or power-up default values if NVR values do not exist. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt> "VT220 Programmer Pocket Guide" EK-VT220-HR-001, page 33StatusstandardSequenceESC dMnemonicCMDDescriptionCoding method delimiter CMD is used as the delimiter of a string of data coded according to Standard ECMA-35 and to switch to a general level of control. The use of CMD is not mandatory if the higher level protocol defines means of delimiting the string, for instance, by specifying the length of the string. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.11StatusstandardSequenceESC dDescriptionSet colour table ESC d Only available if PCVT_SETCOLOR was defined when compiling the kernel, allows to set custom color table for more info, see pcvt_out.c ... Sourcepcvt EscapeSequencesStatuspcvt private; clashes with ECMA-48 CMDSequenceESC lMnemonicLMADescriptionLock memory above This is an alternative way to set the scrolling region, and is not valid in backwards compatibility mode. This sequence sets the top margin to the current line, and the bottom margin extends to the last row of the screen. This has the effect of locking the rows above the current line. This sequence will move the cursor to the beginning of the new region. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusHP privateSequenceESC mMnemonicUSRDescriptionUnlock scrolling region This sequence can be used to remove the scrolling region. The cursor is not moved from its current position. The top, bottom, left and right margins are set to cover the entire screen. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusHP privateSequenceESC nMnemonicLS2DescriptionLocking-shift two LS2 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of LS2 is defined in Standard ECMA-35. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.78StatusstandardSequenceESC oMnemonicLS3DescriptionLocking-shift three LS3 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of LS3 is defined in Standard ECMA-35. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.80StatusstandardSequenceESC { A Ps CRDescriptionAppend to a file Ps is the file name Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>Statusunknown private; clashes with ECMA-48SequenceESC { R Ps CRDescriptionReceive a file Ps is the file name Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>Statusunknown private; clashes with ECMA-48SequenceESC { SDescriptionSave collected text Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>Statusunknown private; clashes with ECMA-48SequenceESC { T Ps CRDescriptionTransmit a file Ps is the file name Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>Statusunknown private; clashes with ECMA-48 SequenceESC |MnemonicLS3RDescriptionLocking-shift three right LS3R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of LS3R is defined in Standard ECMA-35. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.81StatusstandardSequenceESC }MnemonicLS2RDescriptionLocking-shift two right LS2R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of LS2R is defined in Standard ECMA-35. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.79SequenceESC ~MnemonicLS1RDescriptionLocking-shift one right LS1R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of LS1R is defined in Standard ECMA-35. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.77StatusstandardC0 controls (continued)SequenceIS4 (^\)MnemonicIS4DescriptionInformation separator four (FS - file separator) IS4 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item called a file, see 8.2.10. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.72StatusstandardSequenceIS3 (^])MnemonicIS3DescriptionInformation separator three (GS - group separator) IS3 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item called a group, see 8.2.10. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.71StatusstandardSequenceIS2 (^^)MnemonicIS2DescriptionInformation separator two (RS - record separator) IS2 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item called a record, see 8.2.10. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.70StatusstandardSequenceIS1 (^_)MnemonicIS1DescriptionInformation separator one (US - unit separator) IS1 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item called a unit, see 8.2.10. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.69StatusstandardSequenceDELMnemonicDELDescriptionDelete The character DELETE (bit combination 07/15, see ISO/IEC 646, clause 6.5), not being a control function in the strict sense, has been removed from the body of the Standard. DEL was originally used to erase or obliterate an erroneous or unwanted character in punched tape. DEL characters may be inserted into, or removed from, a CC-data-element without affecting its information content, but such action may affect the information layout and/or the control of equipment. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.1Statusstandard; obsoleteC1 controlsSequenceBPH or ESC BMnemonicBPHDescriptionBreak permitted here BPH is used to indicate a point where a line break may occur when text is formatted. BPH may occur between two graphic characters, either or both of which may be SPACE. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.4StatusstandardSequenceNBH or ESC CMnemonicNBHDescriptionNo break here NBH is used to indicate a point where a line break shall not occur when text is formatted. NBH may occur between two graphic characters either or both of which may be SPACE. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.85StatusstandardSequenceIND or ESC DMnemonicINDDescriptionIndex The control function INDEX (IND) which was coded as an element of the C1 set (08/04) and the use of which was already declared deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now been removed. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.2Statusstandard; obsoleteSequenceNEL or ESC EMnemonicNELDescriptionNext line The effect of NEL depends on the setting of the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) and on the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD). If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION and with a parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, NEL causes the active presentation position to be moved to the line home position of the following line in the presentation component. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, NEL causes the active presentation position to be moved to the line limit position of the following line in the presentation component. The line limit position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL). If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA and with a parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, NEL causes the active data position to be moved to the line home position of the following line in the data component. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, NEL causes the active data position to be moved to the line limit position of the following line in the data component. The line limit position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.86StatusstandardSequenceSSA or ESC FMnemonicSSADescriptionStart of selected area SSA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the first of a string of character positions in the presentation component, the contents of which are eligible to be transmitted in the form of a data stream or transferred to an auxiliary input/output device. The end of this string is indicated by END OF SELECTED AREA (ESA). The string of characters actually transmitted or transferred depends on the setting of the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM) and on any guarded areas established by DEFINE AREA QUALIFICATION (DAQ), or by START OF GUARDED AREA (SPA) and END OF GUARDED AREA (EPA). NOTE The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA) should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.138StatusstandardSequenceESA or ESC GMnemonicESADescriptionEnd of selected area ESA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the last of a string of character positions in the presentation component, the contents of which are eligible to be transmitted in the form of a data stream or transferred to an auxiliary input/output device. The beginning of this string is indicated by START OF SELECTED AREA (SSA). NOTE The control function for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA) should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.47StatusstandardSequenceHTS or ESC HMnemonicHTSDescriptionCharacter tabulation set HTS causes a character tabulation stop to be set at the active presentation position in the presentation component. The number of lines affected depends on the setting of the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.62StatusstandardSequenceHTJ or ESC IMnemonicHTJDescriptionCharacter tabulation with justification HTJ causes the contents of the active field (the field in the presentation component that contains the active presentation position) to be shifted forward so that it ends at the character position preceding the following character tabulation stop. The active presentation position is moved to that following character tabulation stop. The character positions which precede the beginning of the shifted string are put into the erased state. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.61StatusstandardSequenceVTS or ESC JMnemonicVTSDescriptionLine tabulation set VTS causes a line tabulation stop to be set at the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.162StatusstandardSequencePLD or ESC KMnemonicPLDDescriptionPartial line forward PLD causes the active presentation position to be moved in the presentation component to the corresponding position of an imaginary line with a partial offset in the direction of the line progression. This offset should be sufficient either to image following characters as subscripts until the first following occurrence of PARTIAL LINE BACKWARD (PLU) in the data stream, or, if preceding characters were imaged as superscripts, to restore imaging of following characters to the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position). Any interactions between PLD and format effectors other than PLU are not defined by this Standard. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.92StatusstandardSequencePLU or ESC LMnemonicPLUDescriptionPartial line backward PLU causes the active presentation position to be moved in the presentation component to the corresponding position of an imaginary line with a partial offset in the direction opposite to that of the line progression. This offset should be sufficient either to image following characters as superscripts until the first following occurrence of PARTIAL LINE FORWARD (PLD) in the data stream, or, if preceding characters were imaged as subscripts, to restore imaging of following characters to the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position). Any interactions between PLU and format effectors other than PLD are not defined by this Standard. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.93StatusstandardSequenceRI or ESC MMnemonicRIDescriptionReverse line feed If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, RI causes the active presentation position to be moved in the presentation component to the corresponding character position of the preceding line. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, RI causes the active data position to be moved in the data component to the corresponding character position of the preceding line. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.104 In earlier versions of ECMA-48, this was known as "Reverse Index". SourcePaul Williams <flo@uk.thalesgroup.com> in comp.terminals <3D19AB54.E35A3B25@uk.thalesgroup.com>StatusstandardSequenceSS2 or ESC NMnemonicSS2DescriptionSingle-shift two SS2 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of SS2 is defined in Standard ECMA-35. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.141StatusstandardSequenceSS3 or ESC OMnemonicSS3DescriptionSingle-shift three SS3 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed. The use of SS3 is defined in Standard ECMA-35. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.142StatusstandardSequenceDCS or ESC PMnemonicDCSDescriptionDevice control string DCS is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for device control use. The command string following may consist of bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The command string represents either one or more commands for the receiving device, or one or more status reports from the sending device. The purpose and the format of the command string are specified by the most recent occurrence of IDENTIFY DEVICE CONTROL STRING (IDCS), if any, or depend on the sending and/or the receiving device. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.27 For Digital VTxxx terminals we've extended this as follows: DCS <introducer-sequence> <string-data> ST The introducer sequence follows exactly the same syntax and symantics as a control sequence except that CSI is replaced by DCS. The <string-data> is control string specific. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>StatusstandardSourcevttest-990712 vt420.cSequenceDCS Ps g data STDescriptionLA100 graphics string Ps = 0, 1, 5 Dot spacing 7.57 mils (132 dpi) SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE12StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Ps p Pr STDescriptionReGIS graphics DCS p or DCS 0 p Re-enter ReGIS at the point where it was last exited. Does not display commands. DCS 1 p Enter ReGIS at command level; ReGIS begins a new command. Does not display commands. DCS x+2 p, x=0 or 1 Like DCS x p, but displays commands on the screen's bottom line. [ Pr is a ReGIS string, which I'm not going to document here just yet. ] Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_regis_news.txt>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS P1 ; P2 ; P3 q Ps STDescriptionSixel graphics P1 is the macro parameter. This parameter indicates the pixel aspect ratio used by the application or terminal. The pixel aspect ratio defines the shape of the pixel dots the terminal uses to draw images. For example, a pixel that is twice as high as it is wide has an aspect ratio of 2:1. NOTE: The macro parameter is provided for compatibility with existing Digital software. New applications should set P1 to 0 and use the set raster attributes control, described later in this chapter. P1 Pixel Aspect Ratio (Vertical:Horizontal) Omitted 2:1 0 or 1 5:1 2 3:1 3 or 4 2:1 5 or 6 2:1 7,8, or 9 1:1 P2 selects how the terminal draws the background color. You can 3$ use one of three values. P2 Meaning 0 or 2 Pixel positions specified as 0 are set to the current background color. 1 Pixel positions specified as 0 remain at their current color. P3 is the horizontal grid size parameter. The horizontal grid size is the horizontal distance between two pixel dots. The VT300 ignores this parameter because the horizontal grid size is fixed at 0.0195 cm (0.0075 in). In the data section: Characters from ? to ~ encode a column of pixels one wide and six high. ? is all-zeros, ~ is all-ones and the low-order bit is at the top. ! Pn encodes a repeat count of the following character - causes the next band of sixels to start below the current one at the left margin $ causes the next band to overlay the current one, starting at the left margin. # Pn selects palette entry Pn. # Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 sets palette entry Pn1 to contain the colour (Pn3, Pn4, Pn5) in the colour space represented by Pn1 (1 = HLS, 2 = RGB). Anything else is ignored. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/all_about_sixels.txt>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Ps r D...D STMnemonicDECLBANDescriptionLoad Banner Message DECLBAN loads the banner message to be displayed on the terminal screen at power up. Parameters Ps denotes the encoding of the message. Ps Description 0 Zero or omitted, default to Ps=2. 1 Interprets as ASCII hexadecimal pairs. See DECLANS. 2 Loads as text in the VT default character set. D ... D is a 30-character string. If a matching Ps value is selected as an encoding method, then you can select to define the string by the characters in the default character set or by hexadecimal pairs. Description This command only loads the banner message into dynamic memory. It is necessary to do a Save settings in the Set-Up menu to store the banner message in NVM so that it will be displayed at power up. The terminal displays the banner message in double size characters above the Selftest OK message. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECLBAN.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Ps v D...D STMnemonicDECLANSDescriptionLoad Answerback Message This sequence loads an answerback message into the terminal's memory. Description The answerback data string may consist of from 0 to 30, 7- or 8-bit characters, which are hex pairs in the range 3/0 - 3/9 (0 through 9), 4/1 - 4/6 (A through F), and 6/1 - 6/6 (A through F). Once defined, the message may be stored in the non-volatile memory if Save settings is executed in the Set-Up. The selective parameter denotes the encoding of the answerback message. A "1" is always used for the VT510 indicating answerback is encoded as hex pairs. The sequence is ignored if any number other than "1" is specified in the Ps field. Pressing Ctrl/Break or receiving ENQ code causes the VT510 to transmit the answerback message. In on-line mode, the answerback message is transmitted to the appropriate host port. The answerback is not echoed in local echo and is not "sent" in local mode. The answerback message is transmitted as keyboard data. Any speed restrictions (as set in limited transmit) apply. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECLANS.html>StatusDEC private; VT510; LA100SequenceDCS 0 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 y FntRcrd ; CommentRecord STMnemonicDECLFFDescriptionLoad font file Ps2 Meaning 0 Print summary sheet 1 Don't print summary sheet Ps3 Meaning 0 Delete all fonts 1 Replace fonts with same ID FntRcrd = data for font set ComentRecord = user supplied text SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE109StatusDEC private; LA100, LN03SequenceDCS Ps1 ; Ps2 ... z Pstr STDescriptionDECtalk commands Synchronize <ESC> P;11z <ESC> \ Load Dictionary <ESC> P0;40z name sub ESC \ Answer Phone <ESC> P;60;10;[number of rings]z <ESC> \ Hang Up Phone <ESC> P;60;11z <ESC> \ Enable Keypad <ESC> P;60;20z <ESC> \ Set Timeout <ESC> P;60;30;[number of seconds]z <ESC> \ Tone Dial <ESC> P;60;40z text <ESC> \ Pulse Dial <ESC> P;60;41z text <ESC> \ On-hook Status (response) <ESC> P;70;0z <ESC> \ Off-hook status (response) <ESC> P;70;1z <ESC> \ Timeout status (response) <ESC> P;70;2z <ESC> \ SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppG6-G9StatusDEC private; DECtalkSequenceDCS Pfn ; Pcn ; Pe ; Pcms ; Pw ; Pt ; Pcmh ; Pcss { Dscs Sxbp1 ; Sxbp2 ; ... STMnemonicDECDLDDescriptionDown-line load DRCS characters Pfn;Pcn;Pe;Pcms;Pw;Pt are parameter characters, separated by semicolons, that define parameters described in Table 4-9. Valid values for Pcms, Pw, and Pt are: Pcms = 0, 2, 3 or 4; Pw = 0, 1 or 2; and Pt = 0 or 1. Invalid combinations are ignored. A font loaded for 80 columns can be used in 132 columns and a font loaded for 132 columns can be used in 80 columns. { (7/11) is the final character that signals the end of the parameter characters and specifies a DECDLD function. Dscs defines the character set "name" for the soft font, and is used in the SCS (select character set) escape sequence. Sxbp1;Sxbp2;...;Sxbpn are sixel bit patterns (1 to 94 patterns) for characters separated by semicolons. Each sixel bit pattern has the form: S...S/S...S where the first S...S represents the upper columns (sixels) of the DRCS character, the slash (2/5) advances the sixel pattern to the lower columns of the DRCS character, and the second S...S represents the lower columns (sixels) of the DRCS (see Figure 4-6). ST (9/12) is the string terminator. It is an 8-bit control character that you can also express as ESC \ (1/11 5/12) when coding for a 7-bit environment. Table 4-9 DECDLD Parameter Characters Parameter Name Description Pfn Font Number Specifies DRCS font buffer to be loaded. The VT220 has only one DRCS font buffer. This parameter has two valid values: 0 and 1. Pcn Starting Character Number Selects starting character in DRCS font buffer to be loaded. For example: Parameter value 1 specifies a column 2/row 1 character, parameter 94 specifies a column 7/row 14 character (Table 2-1 in Chapter 2). Pe Erase Control Selects which characters are erased before loading according to: 0 = erase all characters in this DRCS set 1 = erase only the characters that are being reloaded 2 = erase all characters in all DRCS sets (this font buffer number and other font buffer numbers) Pcms Character Matrix Size Defines the expected limit of the character matrix size according to: 0 = Device default (7 x 10) 1 = (not used) 2 = 5 x 10 3 = 6 x 10 4 = 7 x 10 5 = 5 x Pcmh 6 = 6 x Pcmh 7 = 7 x Pcmh 8 = 8 x Pcmh 9 = 9 x Pcmh 10 = 10 x Pcmh Pw Width Attribute Specifies the width attribute according to: 0 = Device default (80 Columns) 1 = 80 column 2 = 132 column Pt Text/ Full-Cell Allows software to treat the font as a text font or a full-cell font according to: 0 = Device default (text) 1 = Text 2 = Full-Cell (not used) Full-Cell fonts can individually address all pixels in a cell, while text fonts, in general, may not be able to address all pixels individually. Pcmh Character Matrix Height Sets the character matrix size in conjuction with Pcms. The maximum is device-dependent. Pcss Character-set size 0 = 94 characters 1 = 96 characters [ The sixels have MSB at the bottom and an offset of 077 octal applied ] Source<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>StatusDEC private; VT200SequenceDCS 2000 ; Pterm ; Ptag { Ps STMnemonicWRQCMDDescriptionInvoke a reflection command SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusWRQ privateSequenceDCS Ps1 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 | D...D STMnemonicDECUDKDescriptionUser Defined Keys DECUDK downloads definitions for user-defined keys. Parameters Ps1 Ps1 Meaning 0 (default) or none Clear all keys before loading new values. 1 Load new UDK values; clear old values only when redefined. When Ps1 is 1, the terminal only clears the keys you are loading. By using a Ps1 value of 1, you can redefine some keys without redefining them all. Note There are 804 bytes of memory for all user-defined keys. A key definition can only use the number of bytes available when that key is loaded. Programming Tip If Ps1 is 1, a key load may fail because no memory space is available. The reason for this is as follows: With Ps1 set to 1, keys are cleared and loaded sequentially. If the new definition for a key is larger than the old one, then you may exceed the 804 byte limit. Ps2 is the lock parameter. Pl determines whether the key definitions are locked or unlocked after you load them. Ps2 Action 0 or none Lock the keys. If you want to load new values into the keys, then you must unlock the keys by using Set-Up. 1 Do not lock the keys against future redefinition. If Ps2 is 1 and the keys are already locked, then nothing happens. The terminal uses a special lock to prevent or allow the programming of user-defined keys. You can turn on this lock from Set-Up or from the host (with a DECUDK device control string). The lock affects all programmable keys. Ps3 is the modifier parameter. Ps3 designates whether the key is shifted or unshifted. Ps3 Action 0, 2, or none Defines the shifted function key. 1 Defines the unshifted function key. 3 Defines the alternate unshifted function key. 4 Defines the alternate shifted function key. | is the final character. The vertical bar (7/12) identifies this control string as a DECUDK. D...D are the key definition strings such as: Key1/Mod1/Function #/UDS/UDS Direction; Key2/Mod2/Function #/UDS/UDS Direction;........; You include these strings between the final character ( | ) and the string terminator (ST). Each string consists of a key selector number (Kyn), a string parameter (Stn), a slash (/) (2/15), and a direction (Dir). A semicolon (;) (3/11) separates different strings. Kyn is the key selector number of the key you are defining. Tables 5–11 and 5–12 list the definable keys and their identifying values. Table 5–13 compares the function keys on the VT keyboard to equivalent keys on the PC keyboard. Stn is the string parameters, which are the encoded definition of the keys, consisting of hex pairs in the following ranges: 3/0 through 3/9 (0 through 9) 4/1 through 4/6 (A through F) 6/1 through 6/6 (a through f) When you combine these hex values, they represent an 8-bit quantity. This method lets you use any of the 256 character codes in the key string. You can enter key definition strings in any order. Default: Empty. The key is undefined. Dir is the user-defined sequence (UDS) direction. Dir Direction UDS is sent to . . . 0, none Normal Host and/or the terminal, depending on the setting of the COMM mode parameter. The UDS is directed to: The host for full-duplex mode. The screen for half-duplex mode. 1 Local Terminal screen only. 2 Remote Host only. Default: None (Normal) VT Keyboards Kyn Pm = 1 Pm = none, 0, or 2 Key Key 11 F1 Shift/F1 12 F2 Shift/F2 13 F3 Shift/F3 14 F4 Shift/F4 15 F5 Shift/F5 17 F6 Shift/F6 18 F7 Shift/F7 19 F8 Shift/F8 20 F9 Shift/F9 21 F10 Shift/F10 23 F11 Shift/F11 24 F12 Shift/F12 25 F13 Shift/F13 26 F14 Shift/F14 28 F15 Shift/F15 29 F16 Shift/F16 31 F17 Shift/F17 32 F18 Shift/F18 33 F19 Shift/F19 34 F20 Shift/F20 Note Pm values of 3 and 4 are specific to the PC keyboard. They are ignored when you use a VT keyboard. PC Keyboards Kyn Pm Value 1 None, 0 or 2 3 4 11 F1 Shift/F1 Alt/F1 Alt/Shift/F1 12 F2 Shift/F2 Alt/F2 Alt/Shift/F2 13 F3 Shift/F3 Alt/F3 Alt/Shift/F3 14 F4 Shift/F4 Alt/F4 Alt/Shift/F4 15 F5 Shift/F5 Alt/F5 Alt/Shift/F5 17 F6 Shift/F6 Alt/F6 Alt/Shift/F6 18 F7 Shift/F7 Alt/F7 Alt/Shift/F7 19 F8 Shift/F8 Alt/F8 Alt/Shift/F8 20 F9 Shift/F9 Alt/F9 Alt/Shift/F9 21 F10 Shift/F10 Alt/F10 Alt/Shift/F10 23 F11 Shift/F11 Alt/F11 Alt/Shift/F11 24 F12 Shift/F12 Alt/F12 Alt/Shift/F12 Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECUDK.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Ps1 ; Ps2 } IDstring STMnemonicDECATFFDescriptionAssign to font file Ps1 Meaning 1 Assign by font (default) 2 Assign by font family Ps2 = font number for use with SGR IDstring = name associated with font number SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108StatusDEC private; LA100, LN03SequenceDCS Ps ! q ... STDescriptionEnter GIDIS mode SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE126StatusDEC private; LCP01SequenceDCS Ps ~ IDstring STMnemonicDECDTFFDescriptionDelete type family or font file Ps1 Meaning 0 IDstring is type family 1 IDstring is font IDstring = 7 letter family name or 16 letter font ID SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108StatusDEC private; LN03SequenceDCS Pn ! u Ps STMnemonicDECAUPSSDescriptionAssign user-preferred supplemental sets Pn = 0 for 94-character, 1 for 96-character (?) Ps = character set specifier as passed to GZD4 and co. (?) [ It looks like this sets the supplemental set selected by ESC ( < or ESC - < --bjh ] SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ! z Ps STMnemonicDECDMAC You can define macros that are interpreted as normal input when emulating the VT420 terminal. Any macro definitions that do not fit into the memory allotted are ignored. An RIS or DECSR clears all macro definitions. A soft reset (DECSTR) has no effect. Pn1: Macro ID number (0-63). If you give a macro an ID number that already exists, the old macro definition is deleted and the new one is used. If <n1> exceeds 63, Reflection ignores this control function. Everything but the Csi 5i and Csi 4i control functions are passed to the printer. Pn2: Determine how a new macro definition is treated: If Pn2 is 0 or omitted, an old macro with the same macro ID number is deleted. If Pn2 is 1, DECDMAC deletes all current macro definitions before defining this macro. If <n2> is a number that is not 0 or 1, the macro is ignored. Pn3: Select the encoding format for the text of the macro definition: If Pn3 is 0 or omitted, ASCII text is used in the macro. If Pn3 is 1, hex pairs are used (each pair of characters in the macro is the hex value for a single ASCII character. If Pn3 is a number that is not 0 or 1, the macro is ignored. The string of text and control functions to be performed when the macro is invoked. If hex pairs are used, you can also use a repeat introducer (!) in Ps. The repeat introducer lets you repeat any hex pair in the definition string any number of times. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS ! | D...D STMnemonicDECRPTUIDescriptionReport Terminal Unit Information DECRPTUI is a response from the terminal to a tertiary DA (DA3) request from the host. DECRPTUI is available in VT Level 4 mode only. See DA3 for more information. D...D is the unit ID of the terminal, consisting of four hexadecimal pairs. The first pair represents the manufacturing site code. This code can be any hexadecimal value from 00 through FF. The last three pairs are the terminal ID number. This number is unique for each terminal manufactured at that site. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRPTUI.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Pn ! ~ Ps STMnemonicDECCKSRDescriptionChecksum response This is sent by the terminal in response to DECRQCRA or DSR ? 63. Ps is a four-digit hexadecimal checksum. Pn is the identifier given in the checksum request. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceDCS " x D...D STMnemonicDECPFKDescriptionProgram Function Key Used to reprogram function keys. Description This sequence programs one or more keys (and their modifier combinations) from the current state to perform user-desired functions. The type of the function programmed must be either: a local terminal function a user-defined sequence (same as UDK) This sequence is ignored when the program key function is locked through DECPKA, DECUDK, or Set-Up. There are 804 bytes reserved for programmable key operations. This memory is shared by the following four functions: Program keys through DECPFK or through Set-Up Program keys through DECPAK or through Set-Up Copy other key default through DECCKD or Set-Up Program user-defined keys through DECUDK Space is supplied on a first-come, first-serve basis. Once the 804 bytes are used, no more keys may be redefined unless space is made available. Space may be made available by restoring keys back to their default states. There are four ways to do this: Execute a Restore factory defaults from the Set-Up main menu. All the terminal parameters, including the keys, return to their default states. Execute a "Restore factory defaults of all keys and key definitions" either through DECPKA (Program Key Action) or Recall key definitions in Set-Up. This action also releases the 804 bytes. Execute a Copy key default to copy a key's own default either through DECCKD or in Set-Up to free the space occupied by the destination key. Clear UDKs by issuing a clear function in DECUDK. The free bytes left for key programming can be seen using the Define Key Editor in Set-Up. D ... D are the key definition strings such as: Key1/Mod1/Function #/UDS/UDS Direction; Key2/Mod2/Function #/UDS/UDS Direction;........; Parameters Keyn is the key station number and a slash "/" is a delimiter. Refer to Chapter 8 for the key station number map. Modn denotes the modifier key that is to be pressed at the same time as the defined key. Modn Modifier Key 0 or None Normal 1 Normal 2 Shift 3 Alt 4 Alt + Shift 5 Control 6 Shift + Control 7 Alt + Control 8 Alt + Control + Shift Function # represents a number associated with a local function. For example, function number "0" is used to make the key or key/modifier inoperative. Function number "100" indicates a user-defined sequence (UDS) and UDS direction is defined following the slash "/" delimiter. Refer to Chapter 8. UDS is a user-defined sequence with a maximum length of 255 bytes, which must be written in Hex format for DEC/ANSI terminals. Each hex code in this string represents a value transmitted by the defined key combined with the modifiers. UDS in DECPFK is functionally equivalent to the string Stn in the DECUDK control function. See DECUDK--User Defined Keys. Dir (UDS Direction) the user-defined sequence (UDS) direction of the transmission. Dir Direction UDS is sent to . . . 0, none Normal Host and/or the terminal, depending on the setting of the COMM mode parameter. The UDS is directed to: The host for full-duplex mode. The screen for half-duplex mode. 1 Local Terminal screen only. 2 Remote Host only. Default: None (Normal) Description Any of the following four methods may be used to define a key to transmit a user-defined sequence (either single byte or multiple bytes): Control function DECPFK Control function DECPAK Control function DECUDK In Set-Up, Define key ... Once programmed, the key state is not effected by the terminal mode changes listed below: Keyboard mode change, such as switching between Data Processing mode and Typewriter mode Character Mode change, such as switching between 7-bit character and 8-bit character Keyboard Layout change, such as switching between PC layout and VT layout Keyboard Style change, such as switching between PC-style and VT-style Terminal Mode change, such as switching between VT modes This function works in all the ANSI VT modes except VT52 mode. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECPFK.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS " y D...D STMnemomic: DECPAK DescriptionProgram Alphanumeric Key Allow users to reprogram keys to transmit user-preferred alphanumeric codes or to perform user-preferred functions. Description This sequence programs one or more keys (and their modifiers) to: Transmit desired alphanumeric codes Perform a local function or send user-defined sequence This function works in all the VT modes except in VT52 mode. The memory allocation and deallocation processes (program key lock and unlock process) on the DECPAK are the same as on the DECPFK. Refer to DECPFK—Program Function Key for details. The data string D...D format is: Key1/HEX Code String/Function #/UDS/UDS Direction;Key2/...; Parameters Keyn is the key station number and slash "/" is a delimiter. HEX code string is the hex character code to be transmitted with each of the seven modifier states. The hex code represents a valid code in the current character set (either 7-bit or 8-bit). Use a period "." as a place holder if a modifier combination is not to be defined. Use a minus "-" preceding the hex representation of a diacritical sign if a diacritical mark is to be defined. The terminal always allows the ISO character set to be used for specifying accent marks to DECPAK even when: 7-bit NRCs characters are selected The ISO character set is not the user-preferred supplemental character set The corresponding ISO character set would be based on the keyboard language. Refer to Chapter 8 for keyboard information. The position of the diacritical marks within the ISO Latin character sets is as follows: Diacritical Sign Position Available ISO Character Set(s) Circumflex 5/14 ASCII Grave 6/0 ASCII Tilde 7/14 ASCII Dieresis (umlaut) 10/8 Latin 1, Latin 2, Latin Greek, Latin Turkish Degree (ring) 11/0 Latin 1, Latin 2, Latin Greek, Latin Turkish Acute 11/4 Latin 1, Latin 2, Latin Greek, Latin Turkish Cedilla 11/8 Latin 1, Latin 2, Latin Turkish Macron 10/15 Latin 1 Breve 10/2 Latin 2 Ogonek 11/2 Latin 2 Caron 11/7 Latin 2 Double Acute Accent 11/13 Latin 2 Dot Above 15/15 Latin 2 You should program the Hex string according in the following order: Group 1 unshifted Group 1 shifted Group 1 alternate shifted (Shift 2) Group 2 (Group Shift or Alt Gr) unshifted Group 2 shifted Group 2 alternate shifted Control (if omitted, use default) If the control state is not redefined in this sequence, then the Key/Ctrl combination generates the control code based on the "Group 1 unshifted" state. A graphic key transmits alphanumeric codes only when pressed with the above modifiers. When pressed with Alt key, the graphic key performs either: Local terminal function User-defined sequence (same as UDK) Function # corresponds to a local function to be performed when the key is pressed in combination with the Alt function. Example: Function number "0" is used to make the Key/Alt combination inoperative. Function number "100" indicates a user-defined sequence (UDS), and a UDS direction is defined for the Key/Alt combination following the "/" delimiter. UDS and UDS direction is a user-defined sequence. These parameters are the same as for DECPFK. Refer to DECPFK—Program Function Key for the details. Once programmed, the key states are not affected by the terminal mode changes. Refer to DECPFK—Program Function Key for the list of terminal mode changes. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECPAK.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS " z D...D STMnemonicDECCKDDescriptionCopy Key Default Copies the default states of a key and its key/modifier combination to another key and its key/modifier combination. Description This control function copies the default states of a key and all its modifier combinations to another key and its modifier combinations. The source key may have been reprogrammed to perform a non-default function when copy operation is executed. Only the default states of the source key are copied. The source key and the destination key can be two different keys or the same key. If they are different keys, then the copy operation occupies the memory space that is reserved for the operations of control functions, DECPFK, DECPAK, and DECUDK and their equivalent functions in Set-Up. (Refer to DECPFK—Program Function Key for details.) If they are the same key, then the function of the copy operation is to restore the key's default. In this state, the terminal does not allocate new memory space. The terminal frees up the space by deleting the non-default functions of the destination key and its modifier combinations. A function key can copy the default state from a function key or a graphic key. When a graphic key's default is copied, the function key operates as a graphic key. Only the modifiers that are suitable for a graphic key operate with the key. This logic is used when a graphic key copies the default from a function key. Multiple keys can be copied in one sequence. The data string D...D format is: Key-s/Key-d;Key-s/Key-d........; Where: Key-s is the keystation number of the key to be copied. Key-d is the keystation number of the destination key. Once programmed, the key states are not affected by the terminal mode changes. Refer to DECPFK for the list of terminal mode changes. This function works in all the VT modes except in VT52 mode. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECCKD.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS ... " { ... STMnemonicDECFSRDescriptionFont Status Report SourcePaul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail <3844F164.F2242F18@rdel.co.uk>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS " } D...D STMnemonicDECRPFKDescriptionReport Function Key Definition The terminal reports a function key's definition when it receives a DECRQKD. DECRPFK denotes a local function number or a defined sequence, that the target key, which is combined with a specific modifier key, performs or transmits. Parameters D ... D uses the same format as DECPFK, Key/Modifier/Function#/UDS/UDS Direction. Function# is skipped in the report, if the function key has not been redefined and is transmitting the default escape sequence as its UDS. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRPFK.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS " ~ D...D STMnemonicDECRPAKDescriptionReport All Modifiers/Alphanumeric Key State This control string is in response to a Request Key Definition (DECRQKD). String D...D has a format same as DECPAK. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRPAK.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS 1 $ p Ps STMnemonicDECRSTSDescriptionRestore terminal state Sets terminal state. Ps should be a string returned by DECTSR. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT300SequenceDCS 2 $ p Ps STMnemonicDECRSTSDescriptionRestore color table Sets the color table. Ps is as specified under DECCTR. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT300SequenceDCS $ q Ps STMnemonicDECRQSSDescriptionControl function settings request This sequence is sent by the host to request the terminal to report the setting of a control function. The control function in question is specified by Ps, which is the intermediate (if any) and final bytes of the function's control sequence. The following values of Ps are supported: m => SGR r => DECSTBM $ | => DECSCPP $ } => DECSASD $ ~ => DECSSDT " p => DECSCL " q => DECSCA The terminal responds with DECRPSS. Only one control function may be queried at a time. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private [On the VT510] DECRPSS (and DECRQSS) support the following settings or selections: Setting Mnemonic Final Character(s) Select Active Status Display DECSASD $ } Select Attribute Change Extent DECSACE * x Set Character Attribute DECSCA " q Set Conformance Level DECSCL " p Set Columns Per Page DECSCPP $ | Set Lines Per Page DECSLPP t Set Number of Lines per Screen DECSNLS * | Set Status Line Type DECSSDT $ ~ Set Left and Right Margins DECSLRM s Set Top and Bottom Margins DECSTBM r Set Graphic Rendition SGR m Select Set-Up Language DECSSL p Select Printer Type DECSPRTT $ s Select Refresh Rate DECSRFR " t Select Digital Printed Data Type DECSDPT ( p Select ProPrinter Character Set DECSPPCS * p Select Communication Speed DECSCS * r Select Communication Port DECSCP * u Set Scroll Speed DECSSCLS SP p Set Cursor Style DECSCUSR SP q Set Key Click Volume DECSKCV SP r Set Warning Bell Volume DECSWBV SP t Set Margin Bell Volume DECSMBV SP u Set Lock Key Style DECSLCK SP v Select Flow Control Type DECSFC * s Select Disconnect Delay Time DECSDDT $ q Set Transmit Rate Limit DECSTRL " u Set Port Parameter DECSPP + w Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRQSS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Pn $ r Ps STMnemonicDECRPSSDescriptionControl function settings response This sequence is returned by the terminal in response to DECRQSS. Pn is 0 if the request was invalid (e.g. for a function that can't be reported) or 1 if it was successful. Ps is the complete control sequence (minus the leading CSI) necessary to set the state of the requested control function. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private [On the VT510] DECRPSS (and DECRQSS) support the following settings or selections: Setting Mnemonic Final Character(s) Select Active Status Display DECSASD $ } Select Attribute Change Extent DECSACE * x Set Character Attribute DECSCA " q Set Conformance Level DECSCL " p Set Columns Per Page DECSCPP $ | Set Lines Per Page DECSLPP t Set Number of Lines per Screen DECSNLS * | Set Status Line Type DECSSDT $ ~ Set Left and Right Margins DECSLRM s Set Top and Bottom Margins DECSTBM r Set Graphic Rendition SGR m Select Set-Up Language DECSSL p Select Printer Type DECSPRTT $ s Select Refresh Rate DECSRFR " t Select Digital Printed Data Type DECSDPT ( p Select ProPrinter Character Set DECSPPCS * p Select Communication Speed DECSCS * r Select Communication Port DECSCP * u Set Scroll Speed DECSSCLS SP p Set Cursor Style DECSCUSR SP q Set Key Click Volume DECSKCV SP r Set Warning Bell Volume DECSWBV SP t Set Margin Bell Volume DECSMBV SP u Set Lock Key Style DECSLCK SP v Select Flow Control Type DECSFC * s Select Disconnect Delay Time DECSDDT $ q Set Transmit Rate Limit DECSTRL " u Set Port Parameter DECSPP + w Sourcehttps://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRPSS.htmlStatusDEC privateSequenceDCS 1 $ s Ps STMnemonicDECTSRDescriptionTerminal state report This is sent in response to a DECRQTSR, and contains an opaque representation of the terminal's state. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT300SequenceDCS 2 $ s Ps STMnemonicDECCTRDescriptionColor table report This is sent by the terminal in response to DECRQTSR. Ps contains the terminal's colour table. The palette entries are separated by slashes, and each one containe (semicolon-separated): Color ??? Colour space (1 => HLS, 2 => RGB) Components (H;L;S or R;G;B) SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Ps $ t Ps STMnemonicDECRSPSDescriptionRestore presentation state Ps is 1 to restore cursor information and 2 to restore tab stops. Ps is in the format returned by DECCIR or DECTABSR respectively. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS 1 $ u Pr ; Pc ; Pp ; Srend ; Satt ; Sflag ; Pgl ; Pgr ; Scss ; Sdesig STMnemonicDECCIRDescriptionCursor information report See DECRQPSR for request. * Response DCS 1 $ u Pr; Pc; Pp; Srend; Satt; Sflag; Pgl; Pgr; Scss; Sdesig ST * where Pr is cursor row (counted from origin as 1,1) * Pc is cursor column * Pp is 1, video page, a constant for VT320s * Srend = 40h + 8 (rev video on) + 4 (blinking on) * + 2 (underline on) + 1 (bold on) * Satt = 40h + 1 (selective erase on) * Sflag = 40h + 8 (autowrap pending) + 4 (SS3 pending) * + 2 (SS2 pending) + 1 (Origin mode on) * Pgl = char set in GL (0 = G0, 1 = G1, 2 = G2, 3 = G3) * Pgr = char set in GR (same as for Pgl) * Scss = 40h + 8 (G3 is 96 char) + 4 (G2 is 96 char) * + 2 (G1 is 96 char) + 1 (G0 is 96 char) * Sdesig is string of character idents for sets G0...G3, with * no separators between set idents. * If NRCs are active the set idents (all 94 byte types) are: * British A Italian Y * Dutch 4 Norwegian/Danish ' (hex 60) or E or 6 * Finnish 5 or C Portuguese %6 or g or L * French R or f Spanish Z * French Canadian 9 or Q Swedish 7 or H * German K Swiss = * Hebrew %= * (MS Kermit uses any choice when there are multiple) */ Sourcevttest-990712 vt420.cStatusDEC privateSequenceDCS 2 $ u Ps STMnemonicDECTABSRDescriptionTab stop report Sent by the terminal is response to a DECRQPSR. Ps is a slash-separated list of tab stops. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateSequenceDCS Pc $ w Ky1 / Std1 / Stu1 ; ... ; Kyn / Stnd / Stnu STMnemonicDECLKD (also DECLBD)DescriptionLocator key definition Pc - Clear parameter 0 (or omitted) Clear all LKDs before loading new values. All button definition strings are empty (not the default). 1 Clear old definition only for keys that are redefined. Kyn / Stnd / Stnu - Key selection code n, slash delimeter, and string parameter n for down and up key transitions. Kyn is a single ASCII digit, and Std/Stu is a series of ASCII hex pairs. If Std or Stu is omitted, the corresponding button string will be empty. Key definition strings are delimited with a semicolon (";"). Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>StatusDEC private; VT340?SequenceDCS Pn . y Ps STDescriptionxwsh device control Device control string. Ps is a single ansi string (character codes in the range of octal 040 to 0176 inclusive). The following defines what the string is used for. 1 Set the window title. 3 Set the icon title. 4 Set the text color by string. See the -C command for a description of how the string will be interpreted. 5 Set the page color by string. 6 Set the selection text color by string. 7 Set the selection page color by string. 8 Set the cursor text color by string. 9 Set the cursor page color by string. 10 Set the half intensity color by string. 11 Set the bold intensity color by string. 101 Bind the string to the key named by Pn+1. The key numbers are the same as the numbers defined in <device.h>. The string can contain C style backslashed characters to get control characters into the string. When the key is pressed the value will be sent to the process that xwsh is managing. This capability is turned off by default for security. Turn it on with the "-bindkey2dcs" command line option or with the "bindKey2DCS" resource. 103 Bind the string to the key named by Pn+1. The key numbers are the same as the numbers defined in <device.h>. When the key is pressed the value will be used to invoke a function internal to xwsh. This capability is turned off by default for security. Turn it on with the "-bindkey2dcs" command line option or with the "bindKey2DCS" resource. SourceIRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)StatusSGI privateSequencePU1 or ESC QMnemonicPU1DescriptionPrivate use one PU1 is reserved for a function without standardized meaning for private use as required, subject to the prior agreement between the sender and the recipient of the data. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.100StatusstandardSequencePU2 or ESC RMnemonicPU2DescriptionPrivate use two PU2 is reserved for a function without standardized meaning for private use as required, subject to the prior agreement between the sender and the recipient of the data. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.101StatusstandardSequenceSTS or ESC SMnemonicSTSDescriptionSet transmit state STS is used to establish the transmit state in the receiving device. In this state the transmission of data from the device is possible. The actual initiation of transmission of data is performed by a data communication or input/output interface control procedure which is outside the scope of this Standard. The transmit state is established either by STS appearing in the received data stream or by the operation of an appropriate key on a keyboard. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.145StatusstandardSequenceCCH or ESC TMnemonicCCHDescriptionCancel character CCH is used to indicate that both the preceding graphic character in the data stream, (represented by one or more bit combinations) including SPACE, and the control function CCH itself are to be ignored for further interpretation of the data stream. If the character preceding CCH in the data stream is a control function (represented by one or more bit combinations), the effect of CCH is not defined by this Standard. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.8StatusstandardSequenceMW or ESC UMnemonicMWDescriptionMessage waiting MW is used to set a message waiting indicator in the receiving device. An appropriate acknowledgement to the receipt of MW may be given by using DEVICE STATUS REPORT (DSR). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.83StatusstandardSequenceSPA or ESC VMnemonicSPADescriptionStart of guarded area SPA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the first of a string of character positions in the presentation component, the contents of which are protected against manual alteration, are guarded against transmission or transfer, depending on the setting of the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM) and may be protected against erasure, depending on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). The end of this string is indicated by END OF GUARDED AREA (EPA). NOTE The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA) should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.129StatusstandardSequenceEPA or ESC WMnemonicEPADescriptionEnd of guarded area EPA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the last of a string of character positions in the presentation component, the contents of which are protected against manual alteration, are guarded against transmission or transfer, depending on the setting of the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM), and may be protected against erasure, depending on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). The beginning of this string is indicated by START OF GUARDED AREA (SPA). NOTE The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA) should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.46StatusstandardSequenceSOS or ESC XMnemonicSOSDescriptionStart of string SOS is used as the opening delimiter of a control string. The character string following may consist of any bit combination, except those representing SOS or STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the character string depends on the application. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.128StatusstandardSequenceSCI or ESC ZMnemonicSCIDescriptionSingle character introducer SCI and the bit combination following it are used to represent a control function or a graphic character. The bit combination following SCI must be from 00/08 to 00/13 or 02/00 to 07/14. The use of SCI is reserved for future standardization. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.109StatusstandardSequenceCSI or ESC [MnemonicCSIDescriptionControl sequence introducer CSI is used as the first character of a control sequence. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.16StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn @MnemonicICHDescriptionInsert character Parameter default value: Pn = 1 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ICH is used to prepare the insertion of n characters, by putting into the erased state the active presentation position and, depending on the setting of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the n-1 preceding or following character positions in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the active presentation position and an adjacent string of character positions are shifted away from the active presentation position. The contents of n character positions at the other end of the shifted part are removed. The active presentation position is moved to the line home position in the active line. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT (SEE). The effect of ICH on the start or end of a selected area, the start or end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, is not defined by this Standard. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ICH is used to prepare the insertion of n characters, by putting into the erased state the active data position and, depending on the setting of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the n-1 preceding or following character positions in the data component, where n equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the active data position and an adjacent string of character positions are shifted away from the active data position. The contents of n character positions at the other end of the shifted part are removed. The active data position is moved to the line home position in the active line. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.64StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn AMnemonicCUUDescriptionCursor up Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CUU causes the active presentation position to be moved upwards in the presentation component by n line positions if the character path is horizontal, or by n character positions if the character path is vertical, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.22StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pc AMnemonicSBCDescriptionset border color Set the overscan (border) to the color specified. 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn BMnemonicCUDDescriptionCursor down Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CUD causes the active presentation position to be moved downwards in the presentation component by n line positions if the character path is horizontal, or by n character positions if the character path is vertical, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.19StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 BMnemonicSBPDescriptionSet bell parameters Sets bell parameters (where Pn1 is the pitch in Hz and Pn2 is the duration in milliseconds) SourceUnixWare 7 display(7) Set the frequency (Pn1) and duration (Pn2) of the audible bell. The frequency is in units of 840.3 nanoseconds, and the duration is in units of 100 milliseconds. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusiBCS2 privateSequenceCSI Pn CMnemonicCUFDescriptionCursor right Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CUF causes the active presentation position to be moved rightwards in the presentation component by n character positions if the character path is horizontal, or by n line positions if the character path is vertical, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.20StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 CDescriptionSet cursor parameters Sets cursor parameters (where Pn1 is the starting and Pn2 is the ending scanlines of the cursor). SourceUnixWare 7 display(7)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn DMnemonicCUBDescriptionCursor left Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CUB causes the active presentation position to be moved leftwards in the presentation component by n character positions if the character path is horizontal, or by n line positions if the character path is vertical, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.18StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Ps DMnemonicSBIDescriptionSet background intensity Turns the intensity of background colors on (Ps = 1) or off (Ps = 0). Any characters printed with the ``blink'' attribute modifier will instead be displayed as having an intense background. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn EMnemonicCNLDescriptionCursor next line Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CNL causes the active presentation position to be moved to the first character position of the n-th following line in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.12StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Ps EMnemonicSBBDescriptionSet background blink bit Sets (Ps = 1) or clears (Ps = 0) the Blink versus Bold background bit in the M6845 CRT controller. The parameters are the exact inverse of the SBI sequence above. Other than that, they behave the same on the console. In GUI versions of scoansi, the application may distinguish between these two sequences. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn FMnemonicCPLDescriptionCursor preceding line Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CPL causes the active presentation position to be moved to the first character position of the n-th preceding line in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.13StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pc FMnemonicSNFDescriptionset normal foreground color Sets normal foreground color according to Pc: 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceUnixWare 7 display(7) Csi =<n>F Set the default normal foreground color to <n>. This sequence also sets the current color to <n>. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn GMnemonicCHADescriptionCursor character absolute Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CHA causes the active presentation position to be moved to character position n in the active line in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.5.9StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pc GMnemonicSNBDescriptionset normal background color Sets normal background color according to Pc: 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceUnixWare 7 display(7) Csi =<n>G Set the default normal background color to <n>. This sequence also sets the current color to <n>. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 HMnemonicCUPDescriptionCursor position Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1 CUP causes the active presentation position to be moved in the presentation component to the n-th line position according to the line progression and to the m-th character position according to the character path, where n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals the value of Pn2. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.21StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pc HMnemonicSRFDescriptionset reverse foreground color Sets reverse foreground color according to Pc: 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceUnixWare 7 display(7)Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn IMnemonicCHTDescriptionCursor forward tabulation Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CHT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the character position corresponding to the n-th following character tabulation stop in the presentation component, according to the character path, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.5.10StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pc IMnemonicSRBDescriptionset reverse background color Sets reverse background color according to Pc: 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceUnixWare 7 display(7)Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI = ? IDescriptionScreen saver off Sourcejaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals <7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>StatusBA80 privateSequenceCSI Ps JMnemonicEDDescriptionErase in page Parameter default value: Ps = 0 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ED causes some or all character positions of the active page (the page which contains the active presentation position in the presentation component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter values: 0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to the end of the page are put into the erased state 1 the character positions from the beginning of the page up to and including the active presentation position are put into the erased state 2 all character positions of the page are put into the erased state If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ED causes some or all character positions of the active page (the page which contains the active data position in the data component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter values: 0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end of the page are put into the erased state 1 the character positions from the beginning of the page up to and including the active data position are put into the erased state 2 all character positions of the page are put into the erased state Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only, depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.39StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pc JMnemonicSGFDescriptionSet graphic foreground color Sets graphic foreground color according to Pc: 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceUnixWare 7 display(7)Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI ? Ps JMnemonicDECSEDDescriptionSelective erase in display Parameter default value: Ps = 0 Depending on the value of Ps: 0 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from and including the cursor to the end of the screen. Does not affect video line attributes or video character attributes (SGR). 1 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the beginning of the screen to and including the cursor. Does not affect video line attributes or video character attributes (SGR). 2 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) in the entire display. Does not affect video character attributes or video line attributes (SGR). Source<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>StatusDEC private; VT200SequenceCSI ? = JDescriptionScreen saver on Sourcejaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals <7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>StatusBA80 privateSequenceCSI Ps KMnemonicELDescriptionErase in line Parameter default value: Ps = 0 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EL causes some or all character positions of the active line (the line which contains the active presentation position in the presentation component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter values: 0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to the end of the line are put into the erased state 1 the character positions from the beginning of the line up to and including the active presentation position are put into the erased state 2 all character positions of the line are put into the erased state If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EL causes some or all character positions of the active line (the line which contains the active data position in the data component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter values: 0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end of the line are put into the erased state 1 the character positions from the beginning of the line up to and including the active data position are put into the erased state 2 all character positions of the line are put into the erased state Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only, depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.41StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Pc KMnemonicSGBDescriptionset graphic background color Sets graphic background color according to Pc: 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceUnixWare 7 display(7)Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI ? Ps KMnemonicDECSELDescriptionSelective erase in line Parameter default value: Ps = 0 Depending on the value of Ps: 0 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the cursor to the end of the line. Does not affect video line attributes or video character attributes (SGR). 1 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the beginning of the line to and including the cursor position. Does not affect video line attributes or video character attributes. 2 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) on the line. Does not affect video line attributes or video character attributes. Source<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>StatusDEC private; VT200SequenceCSI Pn LMnemonicILDescriptionInsert line Parameter default value: Pn = 1 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, IL is used to prepare the insertion of n lines, by putting into the erased state in the presentation component the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and, depending on the setting of the LINE EDITING MODE (VEM), the n-1 preceding or following lines, where n equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the active line and of adjacent lines are shifted away from the active line. The contents of n lines at the other end of the shifted part are removed. The active presentation position is moved to the line home position in the active line. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT (SEE). Any occurrences of the start or end of a selected area, the start or end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, are also shifted. If the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM) is set to SINGLE, character tabulation stops are cleared in the lines that are put into the erased state. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, IL is used to prepare the insertion of n lines, by putting into the erased state in the data component the active line (the line that contains the active data position) and, depending on the setting of the LINE EDITING MODE (VEM), the n-1 preceding or following lines, where n equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the active line and of adjacent lines are shifted away from the active line. The contents of n lines at the other end of the shifted part are removed. The active data position is moved to the line home position in the active line. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.67StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Ps LMnemonicSEFDescriptionSet emulator feature Control the various emulator features. Parameter Ps indicates the action to be taken: ---------------------------------------------------------------- Value Meaning ---------------------------------------------------------------- 0 New regions filled with the current attribute (default) 1 New regions filled with the normal attribute 2 Disable iBCS2 compliance (default) 3 Enable iBCS2 compliance 4 Disable ANSI SGR0 interpretation (default) 5 Enable ANSI SGR0 interpretation 6 Disable backwards compatibility mode (default) 7 Enable backwards compatibility mode (resets margins too) 8 Cursor motion bound by region (default) 9 Cursor motion unbound 10 Enable 8-bit keyboard meta mode (default) 11 Disable 8-bit keyboard meta mode 12 Disable debugging for this screen (default) 13 Enable debugging for this screen (do not use) 14 Disable global video loop debugging (default) 15 Enable global video loop debugging (do not use) 16 Enable M6845 frame buffer optimization (default) 17 Disable M6845 frame buffer optimization (debugging only) 20 Disable using ESC for meta (high) bit. 21 Enable using ESC for meta (high) bit. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn MMnemonicDLDescriptionDelete line Parameter default value: Pn = 1 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, DL causes the contents of the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and, depending on the setting of the LINE EDITING MODE (VEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding or following lines to be removed from the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. The resulting gap is closed by shifting the contents of a number of adjacent lines towards the active line. At the other end of the shifted part, n lines are put into the erased state. The active presentation position is moved to the line home position in the active line. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). If the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM) is set to SINGLE, character tabulation stops are cleared in the lines that are put into the erased state. The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT (SEE). Any occurrences of the start or end of a selected area, the start or end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, are also shifted. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, DL causes the contents of the active line (the line that contains the active data position) and, depending on the setting of the LINE EDITING MODE (VEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding or following lines to be removed from the data component, where n equals the value of Pn. The resulting gap is closed by shifting the contents of a number of adjacent lines towards the active line. At the other end of the shifted part, n lines are put into the erased state. The active data position is moved to the line home position in the active line. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.32StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Ps MMnemonicRASDescriptionReturn attribute setting Use this sequence to return the current settings for the attribute type specified by Ps. Attributes are returned via the keyboard data input stream as text decimal numbers separated by a space and terminated with a newline. The attribute values returned use the ISO color numbering scheme. For example, if the current normal attribute setting is bright yellow on a blue background, CSI = 0 M would return ``14 1\n''. Ps can be one of the following values: --------------------------------------------------------------- Value Meaning --------------------------------------------------------------- 0 Return the current normal attribute setting 1 Return the current reverse video attribute setting 2 Return the current graphic character attribute setting Colour are: 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Ps NMnemonicEFDescriptionErase in field Parameter default value: Ps = 0 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EF causes some or all character positions of the active field (the field which contains the active presentation position in the presentation component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter values: 0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to the end of the field are put into the erased state 1 the character positions from the beginning of the field up to and including the active presentation position are put into the erased state 2 all character positions of the field are put into the erased state If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EF causes some or all character positions of the active field (the field which contains the active data position in the data component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter values: 0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end of the field are put into the erased state 1 the character positions from the beginning of the field up to and including the active data position are put into the erased state 2 all character positions of the field are put into the erased state Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only, depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.40StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps OMnemonicEADescriptionErase in area Parameter default value: Ps = 0 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EA causes some or all character positions in the active qualified area (the qualified area in the presentation component which contains the active presentation position) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter values: 0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to the end of the qualified area are put into the erased state 1 the character positions from the beginning of the qualified area up to and including the active presentation position are put into the erased state 2 all character positions of the qualified area are put into the erased state If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EA causes some or all character positions in the active qualified area (the qualified area in the data component which contains the active data position) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter values: 0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end of the qualified area are put into the erased state 1 the character positions from the beginning of the qualified area up to and including the active data position are put into the erased state 2 all character positions of the qualified area are put into the erased state Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only, depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.37StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn PMnemonicDCHDescriptionDelete character Parameter default value: Pn = 1 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, DCH causes the contents of the active presentation position and, depending on the setting of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding or following character positions to be removed from the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. The resulting gap is closed by shifting the contents of the adjacent character positions towards the active presentation position. At the other end of the shifted part, n character positions are put into the erased state. The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT (SEE). The effect of DCH on the start or end of a selected area, the start or end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part is not defined by this Standard. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, DCH causes the contents of the active data position and, depending on the setting of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding or following character positions to be removed from the data component, where n equals the value of Pn. The resulting gap is closed by shifting the contents of the adjacent character positions towards the active data position. At the other end of the shifted part, n character positions are put into the erased state. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.26StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps QMnemonicSEEDescriptionSelect editing extent Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SEE is used to establish the editing extent for subsequent character or line insertion or deletion. The established extent remains in effect until the next occurrence of SEE in the data stream. The editing extent depends on the parameter value: 0 the shifted part is limited to the active page in the presentation component 1 the shifted part is limited to the active line in the presentation component 2 the shifted part is limited to the active field in the presentation component 3 the shifted part is limited to the active qualified area 4 the shifted part consists of the relevant part of the entire presentation component. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.115StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 RMnemonicCPRDescriptionActive position report Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, CPR is used to report the active presentation position of the sending device as residing in the presentation component at the n-th line position according to the line progression and at the m-th character position according to the character path, where n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals the value of Pn2. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, CPR is used to report the active data position of the sending device as residing in the data component at the n-th line position according to the line progression and at the m-th character position according to the character progression, where n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals the value of Pn2. CPR may be solicited by a DEVICE STATUS REPORT (DSR) or be sent unsolicited. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.14StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pl ; Pc ; Pp RMnemonicDECXCPRDescriptionExtended Cursor Position [ requested by CSI ? 6 n ] Pl Line Pc Column Pp Page Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECXCPR.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pn SMnemonicSUDescriptionScroll up Parameter default value: Pn = 1 SU causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n line positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n character positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data appear to move up; where n equals the value of Pn. The active presentation position is not affected by this control function. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.147StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn TMnemonicSDDescriptionScroll down Parameter default value: Pn = 1 SD causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n line positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n character positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data appear to move down; where n equals the value of Pn. The active presentation position is not affected by this control function. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.113 [ NB: that paragraph of the standard erroneously claims SD is CSI Pn ^. ] StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 TDescriptionInitiate hilite mouse tracking SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm private; clashes with ECMA-48SequenceCSI Pn UMnemonicNPDescriptionNext page Parameter default value: Pn = 1 NP causes the n-th following page in the presentation component to be displayed, where n equals the value of Pn. The effect of this control function on the active presentation position is not defined by this Standard. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.87StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn VMnemonicPPDescriptionPreceding page Parameter default value: Pn = 1 PP causes the n-th preceding page in the presentation component to be displayed, where n equals the value of Pn. The effect of this control function on the active presentation position is not defined by this Standard. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.95StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps ... WMnemonicCTCDescriptionCursor tabulation control Parameter default value: Ps = 0 CTC causes one or more tabulation stops to be set or cleared in the presentation component, depending on the parameter values: 0 a character tabulation stop is set at the active presentation position 1 a line tabulation stop is set at the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) 2 the character tabulation stop at the active presentation position is cleared 3 the line tabulation stop at the active line is cleared 4 all character tabulation stops in the active line are cleared 5 all character tabulation stops are cleared 6 all line tabulation stops are cleared In the case of parameter values 0, 2 or 4 the number of lines affected depends on the setting of the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.17StatusstandardSequenceCSI ? 5 WMnemonicDECST8CDescriptionSet Tab at Every 8 Columns Set a tab stop at every eight columns starting with column 9. Description Any tab stop setting before this command is executed is cleared automatically. Control function TBC clears the tab stops on the display; HTS sets a horizontal tab stop at the active column. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECST8C.html>StatusDEC private; VT510SequenceCSI Pn XMnemonicECHDescriptionErase character Parameter default value: Pn = 1 If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ECH causes the active presentation position and the n-1 following character positions in the presentation component to be put into the erased state, where n equals the value of Pn. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ECH causes the active data position and the n-1 following character positions in the data component to be put into the erased state, where n equals the value of Pn. Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only, depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.38StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn YMnemonicCVTDescriptionCursor line tabulation Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CVT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the corresponding character position of the line corresponding to the n-th following line tabulation stop in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 8.3.23StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn ZMnemonicCBTDescriptionCursor backward tabulation Parameter default value: Pn = 1 CBT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the character position corresponding to the n-th preceding character tabulation stop in the presentation component, according to the character path, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.7StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps [MnemonicSRSDescriptionStart reversed string Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SRS is used to establish in the data component the beginning and the end of a string of characters as well as the direction of the string. This direction is opposite to that currently established. The indicated string follows the preceding text. The established character progression is not affected. The beginning of a reversed string is indicated by SRS with a parameter value of 1. A reversed string may contain one or more nested strings. These nested strings may be reversed strings the beginnings of which are indicated by SRS with a parameter value of 1, or directed strings the beginnings of which are indicated by START DIRECTED STRING (SDS) with a parameter value not equal to 0. Every beginning of such a string invokes the next deeper level of nesting. This Standard does not define the location of the active data position within any such nested string. The end of a reversed string is indicated by SRS with a parameter value of 0. Every end of such a string re-establishes the next higher level of nesting (the one in effect prior to the string just ended). The direction is re-established to that in effect prior to the string just ended. The active data position is moved to the character position following the characters of the string just ended. The parameter values are: 0 end of a reversed string; re-establish the previous direction 1 beginning of a reversed string; reverse the direction. NOTE 1 The effect of receiving a CVT, HT, SCP, SPD or VT control function within an SRS string is not defined by this Standard. NOTE 2 The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA) should not be used within an SRS string. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.137StatusstandardSequenceCSI [DescriptionIgnore next character However, after CSI [ (or ESC [ [) a single character is read and this entire sequence is ignored. (The idea is to ignore an echoed function key.) SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusLinux private; clashes with ECMA-48 SRSSequenceCSI Ps \MnemonicPTXDescriptionParallel texts Parameter default value: Ps = 0 PTX is used to delimit strings of graphic characters that are communicated one after another in the data stream but that are intended to be presented in parallel with one another, usually in adjacent lines. The parameter values are 0 end of parallel texts 1 beginning of a string of principal parallel text 2 beginning of a string of supplementary parallel text 3 beginning of a string of supplementary Japanese phonetic annotation 4 beginning of a string of supplementary Chinese phonetic annotation 5 end of a string of supplementary phonetic annotations PTX with a parameter value of 1 indicates the beginning of the string of principal text intended to be presented in parallel with one or more strings of supplementary text. PTX with a parameter value of 2, 3 or 4 indicates the beginning of a string of supplementary text that is intended to be presented in parallel with either a string of principal text or the immediately preceding string of supplementary text, if any; at the same time it indicates the end of the preceding string of principal text or of the immediately preceding string of supplementary text, if any. The end of a string of supplementary text is indicated by a subsequent occurrence of PTX with a parameter value other than 1. PTX with a parameter value of 0 indicates the end of the strings of text intended to be presented in parallel with one another. NOTE PTX does not explicitly specify the relative placement of the strings of principal and supplementary parallel texts, or the relative sizes of graphic characters in the strings of parallel text. A string of supplementary text is normally presented in a line adjacent to the line containing the string of principal text, or adjacent to the line containing the immediately preceding string of supplementary text, if any. The first graphic character of the string of principal text and the first graphic character of a string of supplementary text are normally presented in the same position of their respective lines. However, a string of supplementary text longer (when presented) than the associated string of principal text may be centred on that string. In the case of long strings of text, such as paragraphs in different languages, the strings may be presented in successive lines in parallel columns, with their beginnings aligned with one another and the shorter of the paragraphs followed by an appropriate amount of "white space". Japanese phonetic annotation typically consists of a few half-size or smaller Kana characters which indicate the pronunciation or interpretation of one or more Kanji characters and are presented above those Kanji characters if the character path is horizontal, or to the right of them if the character path is vertical. Chinese phonetic annotation typically consists of a few Pinyin characters which indicate the pronunciation of one or more Hanzi characters and are presented above those Hanzi characters. Alternatively, the Pinyin characters may be presented in the same line as the Hanzi characters and following the respective Hanzi characters. The Pinyin characters will then be presented within enclosing pairs of parentheses. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.99StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps ]MnemonicSDSDescriptionStart directed string Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SDS is used to establish in the data component the beginning and the end of a string of characters as well as the direction of the string. This direction may be different from that currently established. The indicated string follows the preceding text. The established character progression is not affected. The beginning of a directed string is indicated by SDS with a parameter value not equal to 0. A directed string may contain one or more nested strings. These nested strings may be directed strings the beginnings of which are indicated by SDS with a parameter value not equal to 0, or reversed strings the beginnings of which are indicated by START REVERSED STRING (SRS) with a parameter value of 1. Every beginning of such a string invokes the next deeper level of nesting. This Standard does not define the location of the active data position within any such nested string. The end of a directed string is indicated by SDS with a parameter value of 0. Every end of such a string re-establishes the next higher level of nesting (the one in effect prior to the string just ended). The direction is re-established to that in effect prior to the string just ended. The active data position is moved to the character position following the characters of the string just ended. The parameter values are: 0 end of a directed string; re-establish the previous direction 1 start of a directed string; establish the direction left-to-right 2 start of a directed string; establish the direction right-to-left NOTE 1 The effect of receiving a CVT, HT, SCP, SPD or VT control function within an SDS string is not defined by this Standard. NOTE 2 The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA) should not be used within an SDS string. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.114StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps ; Pn ... ]DescriptionLinux private sequences ESC [ 1 ; n ] Set color n as the underline color ESC [ 2 ; n ] Set color n as the dim color ESC [ 8 ] Make the current color pair the default attributes. ESC [ 9 ; n ] Set screen blank timeout to n minutes. ESC [ 10 ; n ] Set bell frequency in Hz. ESC [ 11 ; n ] Set bell duration in msec. ESC [ 12 ; n ] Bring specified console to the front. ESC [ 13 ] Unblank the screen. ESC [ 14 ; n ] Set the VESA powerdown interval in minutes. SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusLinux private; clashes with ECMA-48 SDSSequenceCSI Ps ^MnemonicSIMDDescriptionSelect implicit movement direction Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SIMD is used to select the direction of implicit movement of the data position relative to the character progression. The direction selected remains in effect until the next occurrence of SIMD. The parameter values are: 0 the direction of implicit movement is the same as that of the character progression 1 the direction of implicit movement is opposite to that of the character progression. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.120StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn `MnemonicHPADescriptionCharacter position absolute Parameter default value: Pn = 1 HPA causes the active data position to be moved to character position n in the active line (the line in the data component that contains the active data position), where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.57StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn aMnemonicHPRDescriptionCharacter position forward Parameter default value: Pn = 1 HPR causes the active data position to be moved by n character positions in the data component in the direction of the character progression, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.59StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn bMnemonicREPDescriptionRepeat Parameter default value: Pn = 1 REP is used to indicate that the preceding character in the data stream, if it is a graphic character (represented by one or more bit combinations) including SPACE, is to be repeated n times, where n equals the value of Pn. If the character preceding REP is a control function or part of a control function, the effect of REP is not defined by this Standard. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.103StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps cMnemonicDADescriptionDevice attributes Parameter default value: Ps = 0 With a parameter value not equal to 0, DA is used to identify the device which sends the DA. The parameter value is a device type identification code according to a register which is to be established. If the parameter value is 0, DA is used to request an identifying DA from a device. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.24StatusstandardSequenceCSI = Ps cMnemonicHSCDescriptionHide or show cursor Either hide or show the cursor. When you hide the cursor, scoansi remembers its previous shape, so that if you restore it, it is restored to its previous shape. Ps specifies how to handle the cursor, and can be one of the following values: --------------------------------------------------------------- Value Meaning --------------------------------------------------------------- 0 Hide the cursor, saving its shape for a future restore 1 Restore the cursor after hiding or making it very visible 2 Make the cursor very visible, saving its shape for a future restore. If you move from a hidden to a very visible shape, the cursor shape is not stored. This ensures that when a restore command is given, the original cursor shape is restored. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI = Ps cMnemonicDA3DescriptionTertiary Device Attributes In this DA exchange, the host asks for the terminal unit identification code. This ID code serves as a way to identify each terminal in a system. The unit ID code is preset at the factory. Host Request The host uses the following sequence to send this request: CSI = c or CSI = 0 c Terminal Response The terminal responds by sending a report terminal unit ID (DECRPTUI) control string to the host. DECRPTUI is available in VT Level 4 mode only. DCS ! | D ... D ST Parameters D...D is the unit ID of the terminal, consisting of four hexadecimal pairs. The first pair represents the manufacturing site code. This code can be any hexadecimal value from 00 through FF. The last three hexadecimal pairs are the terminal ID number. This number is unique for each terminal manufactured at that site. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DA3.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI > Ps ; ... cMnemonicDA2DescriptionSecondary Device Attributes Host Request The host uses the following sequence to send this request: CSI > c or CSI > 0 c Terminal Response The [VT510] terminal with a VT keyboard uses the following sequence to respond: CSI > 61 ; Pv ; 0 c DA2R for terminal with STD keyboard. CSI > 61 ; Pv ; 1 c DA2R for terminal with PC keyboard. Parameters 61 indicates the identification code of the terminal for the secondary device attributes command. Pv indicates the version level of the firmware implementing the terminal management functions, for example, editing, as shown in the following table. Pv Version 10 V1.0 (released version 1.0) 20 V2.0 (released version 2.0) Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DA2.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI > 0 ; Pv ; Po cMnemonicDA2DescriptionDevice attributes (secondary response; xterm/VT100) xterm returns this to indicate that it's a VT100 even though a real VT100 wouldn't. SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateSequenceCSI > 1 ; Pv ; Po cMnemonicDA2DescriptionDevice attributes (secondary response, VT220) "I am a VT220 (identification code of 1), my firmware version is _____ (Pv), and I have Po options installed." Source<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>StatusDEC private; VT220SequenceCSI ? Ps1 ; ... Psn cMnemonicDA1DescriptionPrimary Device Attributes Host Request The host uses the following sequence to send this request: CSI c or CSI 0 c Terminal Response The terminal responds by sending its architectural class and basic attributes to the host. This response depends on the terminal's current operating VT level. Ps1 ; . . . Psn reports different device attributes between the North American terminal and the international terminal. The value of the first parameter is encoded so a simple range check can be performed to determine the basic service class and level of the device. The VT510 is a level 4 terminal so its service class code is 64. The following extensions to level 4 are provided: Ps Meaning 1 132 columns 2 Printer port 4 Sixel 6 Selective erase 7 Soft character set (DRCS) 8 User-defined keys (UDKs) 9 National replacement character sets (NRCS) (International terminal only) 12 Yugoslavian (SCS) 15 Technical character set 18 Windowing capability 21 Horizontal scrolling 23 Greek 24 Turkish 42 ISO Latin-2 character set 44 PCTerm 45 Soft key map 46 ASCII emulation Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DA1.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI ? 10 cDescriptionRequest DPS configuration Requests that the terminal sends current DPS (Dot Pattern Set) configuration. For the LA100, response is, for each installed DPS (in descending order): ESC [ Ps1 ; Ps2 Ps1 Location 010 DPS 1 011 DPS 2 012 DPS 3 013 DPS 4 014 DPS 5 [ These are the same numbers as are used to select the DPSes in SGR --bjh ] Ps2 ROM ID 001 US/UK Gothic 10 High Density Primary 002 International Gothic 10 High Density Overlay 003 US/UK Gothic 12 High Density Primary 004 International Gothic 12 High Density Overlay 005 US/UK Courier 10 High Density Primary 006 International Courier 10 High Density Overlay 007 US/UK Courier 12 High Density Primary 008 International Courier 12 High Density Overlay 009 US/UK Orator 10 High Density Primary For the LA210, the response is: ESC [ Ps1 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 ; Ps4 ; Ps5 SP D Ps1 is as for the LA100 Ps2 Meaning 1--64 Draft and letter standard DPS 64--128 Draft and memo standard DPS 129--192 Draft and letter custom DPS 192--200 Draft and memo special DPS Odd-numbered standard DPSes contain US and UK character sets. Even-numbered ones also contain many others. Ps3 Type style 0 none 1 Gothic 5 Courier 9 Orator Ps4 Density 0 12/6 cpi 8 10/5 cpi Ps5 Matrix 0 Letter (33x18) 1 Memo (33x9) SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE6,E48-E50StatusDEC private; LA100, LA210SequenceCSI ? Ps1 ; Ps2 ; ... ; Psn cMnemonicDSDescriptionDevice attributes (DEC) This is a response from the terminal to DA. Ps1 specifies the operating level of the terminal. This determines the meaning of the other Pses (if any). Ps1 == 1 VT100; Ps2 is a bitmask: 1 => STP (processor option) 2 => AVO (advanced video option) 4 => GPO (graphics processor option) 8 => PP??? Ps1 == 2 VT102 Ps1 == 4 VT132; Ps2 same as VT100 Ps1 == 5 VK100 (GIGI) Ps1 == 6 VT102 (again?) Ps1 == 7 VT131 Ps1 == 10 Letterprinter Ps2 absent => LA100 microcode version 1 (7-bit) Ps2 == 2 => LA100 microcode version 2 (8-bit) PS2 == 3 => LA210 microcode version 2 (8-bit) Ps1 == 12 VT125; Ps2 same as VT100; Graphics firmware version in Ps3 Ps1 == 13 LQP02 Ps1 == 15, Ps2 == 1 LA12 (DECwriter Correspondent) Ps1 == 17 LA50 Ps1 == 19 DECtalk Ps1 == 61 Operating level 1 (emulated VT100) Ps1 == 62 Operating level 2 (VT200) Ps1 == 63 Operating level 3 (VT300) Ps1 == 64 Operating level 4 (VT400) Ps1 == 65 Operating level 5 (VT500) for 61--62, the other Ps are a list of features: Ps meaning 1 132 columns 2 Printer port 3 ReGIS graphics 4 Sixel graphics 6 Selective erase 7 Soft character set (DRCS) 8 User-defined keys 9 National replacement character sets 10 Text ruling vector 11 25th status line 12 Serbo-croatian (SCS) 13 Local editing mode 14 8-bit architecture 15 Technical character set 16 Locator device port (ReGIS) 17 Terminal state reports 18 Windowing capability 19 Dual sessions 21 Horizontal scrolling 22 Colour 23 Greek 24 Turkish 29 ANSI text locator 39 Page memory extension 42 ISO Latin-2 44 PC Term 45 Soft key mapping 46 ASCII terminal emulation (Wyse, TVI etc) Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>Sourcevttest-990712 reports.cSourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppC31,E11,E19,E50,E84,E90,G6StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pn dMnemonicVPADescriptionLine position absolute Parameter default value: Pn = 1 VPA causes the active data position to be moved to line position n in the data component in a direction parallel to the line progression, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.158StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn eMnemonicVPRDescriptionLine position forward Parameter default value: Pn = 1 VPR causes the active data position to be moved by n line positions in the data component in a direction parallel to the line progression, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.160StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 fMnemonicHVPDescriptionCharacter and line position Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1 HVP causes the active data position to be moved in the data component to the n-th line position according to the line progression and to the m-th character position according to the character progression, where n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals the value of Pn2. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.63StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps gMnemonicTBCDescriptionTabulation clear Parameter default value: Ps = 0 TBC causes one or more tabulation stops in the presentation component to be cleared, depending on the parameter value: 0 the character tabulation stop at the active presentation position is cleared 1 the line tabulation stop at the active line is cleared 2 all character tabulation stops in the active line are cleared 3 all character tabulation stops are cleared 4 all line tabulation stops are cleared 5 all tabulation stops are cleared In the case of parameter value 0 or 2 the number of lines affected depends on the setting of the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM) SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.154Statusstandard If the first parameter has a value of 100 then tab stops are reset to the default state (one every 8 columns). SourceIRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)StatusSGI private; clashes with ECMA-48SequenceCSI = Pn1 g or CSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 gMnemonicPRCDescriptionPrint ROM character If only one argument is passed to this function, display the glyph for the PC ROM character specified by Pn1. If 3 parameters are passed, then then Pn2 and Pn3 are used to set the graphic character attribute foreground and background respectively, using the ISO color numbering scheme described below. 0 => black 8 => grey 1 => blue 9 => light blue 2 => green 10 => light green 3 => cyan 11 => light cyan 4 => red 12 => light red 5 => magenta 13 => light magenta 6 => brown 14 => yellow 7 => white 15 => light white SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI > Pn gDescriptionRe-set tabs Clear all horizontal tab stops, then set tabs every Pn positions (i.e. Esc-[->-5-g sets tabs every five columns) Source<URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>StatusRBComm? privateSequenceCSI Ps ... hMnemonicSMDescriptionSet mode No parameter default value. SM causes the modes of the receiving device to be set as specified by the parameter values. NOTE Private modes may be implemented using private parameters, see 5.4.1 and 7.4. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.2.125 [ NB: See "Mode" entries for individual modes ] StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps iMnemonicMCDescriptionMedia copy Parameter default value: Ps = 0 MC is used either to initiate a transfer of data from or to an auxiliary input/output device or to enable or disable the relay of the received data stream to an auxiliary input/output device, depending on the parameter value: 0 initiate transfer to a primary auxiliary device 1 initiate transfer from a primary auxiliary device 2 initiate transfer to a secondary auxiliary device 3 initiate transfer from a secondary auxiliary device 4 stop relay to a primary auxiliary device 5 start relay to a primary auxiliary device 6 stop relay to a secondary auxiliary device 7 start relay to a secondary auxiliary device This control function may not be used to switch on or off an auxiliary device. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.82 Locator Controller Mode allows the host to communicate directly with the locator device without terminal intervention (similar to printer controller mode). When locator controller mode is set, all data received at the host port is transferred directly to the locator port without interpretation by the display terminal. The only exceptions are the communications control characters XON/XOFF (if enabled), and the control sequence to disabled locator controller mode. All characters received at locator port are transferred to the host port without interpretation. The host assumes full responsibility for the locator device. Locator controller mode is desirable for two reasons: 1. It allows the host to explicitly initialize or configure locator devices. A foriegn locator device might not wake up in DEC format for example. 2. It allows the locator port to be used for other auxilliary input devices. A bar code reader could be interfaced to the locator port for example, allowing the terminal to support a bar code reader without pre-empting the printer port. Turn off locator controller mode (MC) CSI 6 i Turn on locator controller mode (MC) CSI 7 i Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>Statusstandard; DEC modificationsSequenceCSI ? Ps iMnemonicMCDescriptionMedia copy (DEC extensions) ?0 Select auxiliary port for ReGIS hardcopy output. ?1 copy the cursor line to the auxilary(printer)Port ?2 Select computer port for ReGIS hardcopy output. ?3 copy the cursor line to the modem(host) Port ?4 disable the copy passthru print mode ?5 enable the copy passthru print mode ?8 Disables communication from the printer port to the host ?9 Enables communication from the printer port to the host. ?10 Prints the data on the screen. Printer extent mode (DECPEX) does not affect this function [unlike CSI 0 i]. ?11 Prints all pages in page memory. If print form feed mode (DECPFF) is set, then the terminal sends a form feed (FF) to the printer after each page. Source<URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC31StatusWyse/DEC privateSequenceCSI Pn jMnemonicHPBDescriptionCharacter position backward Parameter default value: Pn = 1 HPB causes the active data position to be moved by n character positions in the data component in the direction opposite to that of the character progression, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.58StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn kMnemonicVPBDescriptionLine position backward Parameter default value: Pn = 1 VPB causes the active data position to be moved by n line positions in the data component in a direction opposite to that of the line progression, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.159StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn kDescriptiondisable (n=0) or enable (n=1) keyclick Sourcetermtypes.master 10.2.7StatusiBCS2 private; clashes with ECMA-48 HPBSequenceCSI Ps ... lMnemonicRMDescriptionReset mode No parameter default value. RM causes the modes of the receiving device to be reset as specified by the parameter values. NOTE Private modes may be implemented using private parameters, see 5.4.1 and 7.4. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.106 [ see "Mode" entries for individual modes ] StatusstandardSequenceCSI = lMnemonicCHCDescriptionClear and home cursor Much like the Form Feed (FF) ASCII control character, this sequence will erase the entire screen using the current fill attribute, but it will ignore the current scrolling region if set (the entire screen is always cleared, regardless of the scrolling region settings). The cursor will be left at the top left of the scrolling region. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI = ? lDescriptionInsert line up Sourcejaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals <7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>Status? privateSequenceCSI Ps ... mMnemonicSGRDescriptionSelect graphic rendition Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SGR is used to establish one or more graphic rendition aspects for subsequent text. The established aspects remain in effect until the next occurrence of SGR in the data stream, depending on the setting of the GRAPHIC RENDITION COMBINATION MODE (GRCM). Each graphic rendition aspect is specified by a parameter value: [ In the following list, items are marked with their source on the right. Items with no marking are ECMA-48 standard ones. ] 0 default rendition (implementation-defined), cancels the effect of any preceding occurrence of SGR in the data stream regardless of the setting of the GRAPHIC RENDITION COMBINATION MODE (GRCM) 1 bold or increased intensity 2 faint, decreased intensity or second colour 2 Sets the normal colors. This sequence takes the next two arguments as the foreground and background color to set, respectively Uses SCO colour numbers. [SCOANSI] 3 italicized 3 If backwards compatibility mode is enabled, then this sequence is used to control the role of the blink bit in the M6845 video controller. The argument following the 3 indicated whether this bit should be interpreted as blink, or as bold background. For example, the sequence CSI 3;1 m will enable blinking text, whereas the sequence CSI 3;0 m will enable bright background colors. [SCOANSI] 4 singly underlined 5 slowly blinking (less then 150 per minute) 6 rapidly blinking (150 per minute or more) 6 VGA only: if blink (5) is on, turn blink off and background color to its light equivalent (that is, brown to yellow) [iBCS2] 6 steady (not blinking) [SCOANSI] 7 negative image 8 concealed characters 9 crossed-out (characters still legible but marked as to be deleted) 10 primary (default) font 10 reset selected mapping, display control flag, and toggle meta flag. [iBCS2] 11 first alternative font 11 select null mapping, set display control flag, reset toggle meta flag. [iBCS2] 12 second alternative font 12 select null mapping, set display control flag, set toggle meta flag. (The toggle meta flag causes the high bit of a byte to be toggled before the mapping table translation is done.) [Linux] 13 third alternative font 14 fourth alternative font 15 fifth alternative font 16 sixth alternative font 17 seventh alternative font 18 eighth alternative font 19 ninth alternative font 20 Fraktur (Gothic) 21 doubly underlined 21 set normal intensity [Linux] 22 normal colour or normal intensity (neither bold nor faint) 23 not italicized, not fraktur 24 not underlined (neither singly nor doubly) 25 steady (not blinking) 26 (reserved for proportional spacing as specified in CCITT Recommendation T.61) 27 positive image 28 revealed characters 29 not crossed out 30 black display 31 red display 32 green display 33 yellow display 34 blue display 35 magenta display 36 cyan display 37 white display 38 (reserved for future standardization; intended for setting character foreground colour as specified in ISO 8613-6 [CCITT Recommendation T.416]) 38 set underscore on, set default foreground color [Linux] 38 If next two parameters are 5 and Ps, set foreground color to Ps [xterm] 38 enables underline option; white foreground with white underscore [iBCS2] 39 default display colour (implementation-defined) 39 disables underline option [iBCS2] 40 black background 41 red background 42 green background 43 yellow background 44 blue background 45 magenta background 46 cyan background 47 white background 48 (reserved for future standardization; intended for setting character background colour as specified in ISO 8613-6 [CCITT Recommendation T.416]) 48 If next two parameters are 5 and Ps, set background color to Ps [xterm] 49 default background colour (implementation-defined) 50 (reserved for cancelling the effect of the rendering aspect established by parameter value 26) 50 Reset to the original color pair [SCOANSI] 51 framed 51 Reset all colors to the system default [SCOANSI] 52 encircled 53 overlined 54 not framed, not encircled 55 not overlined 56 (reserved for future standardization) 57 (reserved for future standardization) 58 (reserved for future standardization) 59 (reserved for future standardization) 60 ideogram underline or right side line 61 ideogram double underline or double line on the right side 62 ideogram overline or left side line 63 ideogram double overline or double line on the left side 64 ideogram stress marking 65 cancels the effect of the rendition aspects established by parameter values 60 to 64 90 Set foreground color to (bright) Black [aixterm] 91 Set foreground color to (bright) Red [aixterm] 92 Set foreground color to (bright) Green [aixterm] 93 Set foreground color to (bright) Yellow [aixterm] 94 Set foreground color to (bright) Blue [aixterm] 95 Set foreground color to (bright) Magenta [aixterm] 96 Set foreground color to (bright) Cyan [aixterm] 97 Set foreground color to (bright) White [aixterm] 90 Set foreground color to (bright) Black [SCOANSI] 91 Set foreground color to (bright) Blue [SCOANSI] 92 Set foreground color to (bright) Green [SCOANSI] 93 Set foreground color to (bright) Cyan [SCOANSI] 94 Set foreground color to (bright) Red [SCOANSI] 95 Set foreground color to (bright) Magenta [SCOANSI] 96 Set foreground color to (bright) Yellow [SCOANSI] 97 Set foreground color to (bright) White [SCOANSI] 100 Set foreground and background color to default [rxvt] 100 Set background color to (bright) Black [aixterm] 101 Set background color to (bright) Red [aixterm] 102 Set background color to (bright) Green [aixterm] 103 Set background color to (bright) Yellow [aixterm] 104 Set background color to (bright) Blue [aixterm] 105 Set background color to (bright) Magenta [aixterm] 106 Set background color to (bright) Cyan [aixterm] 107 Set background color to (bright) White [aixterm] 100 Set background color to (bright) Black [SCOANSI] 101 Set background color to (bright) Blue [SCOANSI] 102 Set background color to (bright) Green [SCOANSI] 103 Set background color to (bright) Cyan [SCOANSI] 104 Set background color to (bright) Red [SCOANSI] 105 Set background color to (bright) Magenta [SCOANSI] 106 Set background color to (bright) Yellow [SCOANSI] 107 Set background color to (bright) White [SCOANSI] DEC private SGRs: ?1 Set secondary overprint mode [LQP02] ?2 Enable shadow print [LQP02] NOTE The usable combinations of parameter values are determined by the implementation. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.118SourceLinux console_codes(4)Sourcetermtypes.master 10.2.7SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.52 2004/04/18 15:18:48SourceUnixWare 7 display(7)SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)Statusstandard; Linux, iBCS2, aixterm extensionsSequenceCSI = Ps ; Pn mMnemonicSSMDescriptionSet specific margin This sequence can be used to set any one of the 4 margins. Parameter Ps indicates which margin to set (Ps=0 for the top margin, Ps=1 for the bottom, Ps=2 for the left and Ps=3 for the right). Pn is the row or column to set the margin to. If after this control sequence has been processed, the top or bottom margins are not at the top of the screen, and the left and right margins are at the screen boundary, then the scrolling region is set to the size specified. If either of the left or right margins are not at the screen boundary then the scrolling region is bound by the current margins. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI ? = mDescriptionDelete line down Sourcejaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals <7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>Status? privateSequenceCSI Ps nMnemonicDSRDescriptionDevice status report Parameter default value: Ps = 0 DSR is used either to report the status of the sending device or to request a status report from the receiving device, depending on the parameter values: 0 ready, no malfunction detected 1 busy, another DSR must be requested later 2 busy, another DSR will be sent later 3 some malfunction detected, another DSR must be requested later 4 some malfunction detected, another DSR will be sent later 5 a DSR is requested 6 a report of the active presentation position or of the active data position in the form of ACTIVE POSITION REPORT (CPR) is requested DSR with parameter value 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 may be sent either unsolicited or as a response to a request such as a DSR with a parameter value 5 or MESSAGE WAITING (MW). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.35Statusstandard 100-107 Report the rgb value (#rrggbb) for a given color using a DCS Pn .y Ps ST escape sequence (see DCS below for the values that xwsh will use for Pn). DSR parameter 100 maps to the text color, 101 to the page color, 102 the selection text color, 103 to the selection page color, 104 to the cursor text color, 105 to the cursor page color, 106 to the half intensity color and 107 to the bold color. SourceIRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)StatusSGI private; clashes with ECMA-48SequenceCSI ? Pn nMnemonicDSRDescriptionDevice status report Request CSI ? 1 n [LA50] disable all unsolicited status reports. Request CSI ? 2 n [LA50] enable unsolicited brief reports and send an extended one. Request CSI ? 3 n [LA50] enable unsolicited extended reports and send one. Response CSI ? 20 n malfunction detected [also LCP01] then CSI ? Ps ... n Ps Fault 21 Hardware failure 22 Communication failure (event) 23 Input buffer overflow (event) 24 Printer deselected 26 Cover open 27 Out of consumables (ink/paper) 28 Program load failure 42 Font load failure 44 Font memory exceeded 104 Too many fonts Request CSI ? 6 n extended cursor position request (returns DECXCPR) Request CSI ? 15 n printer status Response CSI ? 10 n printer ready or CSI ? 11 n printer is not ready or CSI ? 13 n no printer or CSI ? 18 n printer busy or CSI ? 19 n printer assigned to other session Request CSI ? 25 n User Definable Key status Response CSI ? 20 n UDKs are unlocked or CSI ? 21 n UDKs are locked Request CSI ? 26 n keyboard dialect Response CSI ? 27; Ps ; Pst ; Ptyp n in MS Kermit this is controlled by command SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET <country> Ps Country 0 Keyboard language cannot be determined 1 North American/ASCII 2 British 3 Flemish 4 French Canadian 5 Danish 6 Finnish 7 German 8 Dutch 9 Italian 10 Swiss (French) 11 Swiss (German) 12 Swedish 13 Norwegian/Danish 14 Hebrew 14 French 15 Spanish 16 Portugese 19 Hebrew 22 Greek 28 Canadian (English) 29 Turkish-Q/Turkish 30 Turkish-F/Turkish 31 Hungarian 33 Slovak 35 Polish 36 Romanian 38 SCS 39 Russian 40 Latin American Pst Keyboard status 0 Keyboard Ready The terminal sends typed characters to the current session. 3 No Keyboard The terminal does not detect the keyboard. 8 Keyboard Busy The other session is currently using the keyboard. The terminal only sends Pst in VT level 4 mode. Ptyp Keyboard Type 4 LK450 5 PCXAL Request CSI ? 55 n locator status Response CSI ? 53 n no locator or CSI ? 50 n locator ready or CSI ? 58 n locator busy Request CSI ? 56 n locator type Response CSI ? 57 Ps n Ps = 0 => No locator Ps = 1 => Locator is a mouse Request CSI ? 62 n The host asks for the available macro space in the form of a macro space report (DECMSR). Request CSI ? 63 ; Pn n Request checksum of macro definitions Pn is returned with DECCKSR Request CSI ? 75 n The host asks for the status of the data integrity flag. Response CSI ? 70 n Ready, no communication errors or power-ups have occurred since last report. or CSI ? 71 n Malfunction, a communication error has occurred since the last report. or CSI ? 73 n The terminal has not reported data integrity since the last power-up or hard reset (RIS). Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/swedish_vt102_codes.txt>Sourcevttest-990712 vt220.cSourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECXCPR.html>Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DSR-DIR.html>Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DSR-KBD.html>Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DSR-MSR.html>Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DSR-PP.html>SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE84,E124StatusDEC private; VT200SequenceCSI Ps ... oMnemonicDAQDescriptionDefine area qualification Parameter default value: Ps = 0 DAQ is used to indicate that the active presentation position in the presentation component is the first character position of a qualified area. The last character position of the qualified area is the character position in the presentation component immediately preceding the first character position of the following qualified area. The parameter value designates the type of qualified area: 0 unprotected and unguarded 1 protected and guarded 2 graphic character input 3 numeric input 4 alphabetic input 5 input aligned on the last character position of the qualified area 6 fill with ZEROs 7 set a character tabulation stop at the active presentation position (the first character position of the qualified area) to indicate the beginning of a field 8 protected and unguarded 9 fill with SPACEs 10 input aligned on the first character position of the qualified area 11 the order of the character positions in the input field is reversed, i.e. the last position in each line becomes the first and vice versa; input begins at the new first position. This control function operates independently of the setting of the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM). The character tabulation stop set by parameter value 7 applies to the active line only. NOTE The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA) should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.25StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps pMnemonicDECSSLDescriptionSelect Set-Up Language Select one of several languages for Set-Up display menus. Parameters Ps indicates the set-up language. Ps Set-Up Language 0, 1 or none English 2 French 3 German 4 Spanish Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSSL.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI pMnemonicSUNBOWDescriptionBlack on white Sets the display into black-on-white mode (the default). SourceSunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]StatusSun privateSequenceCSI Ps pDescriptionBegin field attribute Ps is a variable representing Ps =0 normal 1 dim 2 blink 3 blink dim 4 blank 5 blank dim 6 blank 7 blank dim 8 underline 9 underline dim 10 underline blink 11 underline blink dim 12 underline blank 13 underline blank dim 14 Underline blank blink 15 underline blank blink dim 16 Inverse 17 inverse dim 18 inverse blink 19 Inverse blink dim 20 inverse blank 21 inverse blank dim 22 inverse blank 23 inverse blank dim 24 inverse underline 25 inverse underline dim 26 inverse underline blink 27 inverse underline blink dim 28 inverse underline blank 29 inverse underline blank dim 30 inverse underline blank blink 31 inverse underline blank blink di Source<URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>StatusDEC private?SequenceCSI Ps qMnemonicDECLLDescriptionLoad LEDs Load the four programmable LEDs on the keyboard according to the parameter(s). Parameter Meaning ----------------------- 0 Clear All LEDs (default) 1 Light L1 2 Light L2 3 Light L3 4 Light L4 Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt> ESC [ 0 q: clear all LEDs ESC [ 1 q: set Scroll Lock LED ESC [ 2 q: set Num Lock LED ESC [ 3 q: set Caps Lock LED SourceLinux console_codes(4) Load the programmable LEDs on the keyboard according to its parameters. Ps selects the state of the Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock LEDs as follows: Ps LED Light Condition 0 Num Lock Off Caps Lock Off Scroll Lock Off 1 Num Lock On 2 Caps Lock On 3 Scroll Lock On 21 Num Lock Off 22 Caps Lock Off 23 Scroll Lock Off Description DECLL controls keyboard LEDs independently of any keyboard state. The use of LEDs for this purpose conflicts with their use as keyboard state indicators. DECKLHIM selects a mode of how the keyboard LEDs are to be used: as keyboard indicators; or host indicators. If host indicators is selected, then the DECLL sequence can be used to control the keyboard LEDs. For DECLL to function, DECKLHIM must be set. Sourcehttps://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECLL.htmlStatusDEC private; VT100SequenceCSI qMnemonicSUNWOBDescriptionWhite on black Sets the display to white-on-black mode. SourceSunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]StatusSun privateSequenceCSI Pt ; Pb rMnemonicDECSTBMDescriptionSet top and bottom margins Pt is the number of the top line of the scrolling region; Pb is the number of the bottom line of the scrolling region and must be greater than Pt. (The default for Pt is line 1, the default for Pb is the end of the screen) Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 rMnemonicCSRDescriptionChange Scrolling Region Where 3 or more parameters are specified, the parameters are the top, bottom, left and right margins respectively. If you omit the last parameter, the extreme edge of the screen is assumed to be the right margin. If any of the parameters are out of bounds, they are clipped. If any of the parameters would cause an overlap (i.e. the bottom margin is higher than the top margin, or the right margin is less that the left margin), then this command is ignored and no scrolling region or window will be active. If all of the parameters are correct, then the cursor is moved to the top left hand corner of the newly-created region. The new region will now define the bounds of all scroll and cursor motion operations. [ If only two parameters are specified, this behaves as DECSTBM ] SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn rMnemonicSUNSCRLDescriptionSet scrolling Default parameter: Pn = 0 If Pn > 0, sets the screen to scroll Pn lines whenever a LF would push the cursor off the bottom. Setting it to the number of lines on the screen causes the screen to clear when it fills. If Pn == 0, sets "wrap mode", where the cursor moves back to the top line of the screen when LFed off the bottom, and where lines are cleared when the cursor LFs into them. SourceSunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]StatusSun privateSequenceCSI = rMnemonicRSMDescriptionReset margins This sequence can be used to reset all of the margins to cover the entire screen. This will deactivate the scrolling region (if defined). If not, this sequence has no effect. The cursor is not moved. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI ? Ps rDescriptionRestore DEC Private Mode Ps = 1 -> Normal/Application Cursor Keys (DECCKM) Ps = 3 -> 80/132 Column Mode (DECCOLM) Ps = 4 -> Jump (Fast)/Smooth (Slow) Scroll (DECSCLM) Ps = 5 -> Normal/Reverse Video (DECSCNM) Ps = 6 -> Normal/Origin Cursor Mode (DECOM) Ps = 7 -> No Wraparound/Wraparound Mode (DECAWM) Ps = 8 -> Auto-repeat/No Auto-repeat Keys (DECARM) Ps = 9 -> Don't Send/Send MIT Mouse Row & Column on Button Press Ps = 40 -> Disallow/Allow 80 <-> 132 Mode Ps = 41 -> Off/On curses(5) fix Ps = 44 -> Turn Off/On Margin Bell Ps = 45 -> No Reverse-wraparound/Reverse-wraparound Mode Ps = 46 -> Stop/Start Logging Ps = 47 -> Use Normal/Alternate Screen Buffer Ps = 1000 -> mouse bogus sequence (???) Ps = 1001 -> mouse bogus sequence (???) Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt>Statusxterm? privateSequenceCSI ? Ps1 ; Ps2 rMnemonicDECPCTERMDescriptionEnter/Exit PCTerm or Scancode Mode DECPCTERM enables you to switch the terminal between VT mode and PCTerm mode, while the terminal is in VT mode. It also enables you to switch the terminal between ASCII character and scancode keycode mode, while the terminal is in SCO Console mode. Parameters Ps1 selects VT mode or PCTerm mode. In SCO console mode, this parameter selects ASCII characters or scancode keycode mode. When the mode changes, some operating features are changed to reflect the characteristics of the selected emulation mode. Ps1 VT Emulation Mode SCO Console Mode 0 or none VT Mode ASCII characters 1 PCTerm Mode Scancodes Ps2 indicates the character set selection. See SCS--Select Character Set for the character set designators. Description The character sets selectable with single-digit Ps2 parameters are available for both VT mode and PCTerm mode. If you select one of these character sets for use in PCTerm mode, then you can use the SCS—Select Character Set command to modify the PCTerm character set. The PC character sets selectable with three-digit Ps2 parameters are available only in PCTerm mode or SCO console emulation. (SCO console uses PC character sets.) If you select one of these PC character sets, then the SCS command to invoke a character set is ignored. Ps2 Character Set 0 or none No Change 1 PC Multilingual 2 PC International 3 PC Danish/Norwegian 4 PC Spanish 5 PC Portuguese 6 DEC Supplemental 7 ISO Latin 1 8 VT character set 210 PC Greek 220 PC Spanish 437 PC International 850 PC Multilingual 852 PC Slavic (Latin 2) 857 PC Turkish 860 PC Portuguese 862 PC Hebrew 863 PC French Canadian 865 PC Danish 866 PC Cyrillic Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECPCTERM.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 sMnemonicDECSLRMDescriptionSet left and right margins Sets left margin to Pn1, right margin to Pn2 SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10StatusDEC private; VT400, printersSequenceCSI sMnemonicSCPDescriptionSave cursor position Save the current cursor position. The cursor position can be restored later using the RCP sequence. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI sMnemonicSUNRESETDescriptionReset terminal emulator Resets modes and font. Doesn't move cursor or change screen. SourceSunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]StatusSun privateSequenceCSI ? Ps sDescriptionSave DEC Private Mode Ps = 1 -> Normal/Application Cursor Keys (DECCKM) Ps = 3 -> 80/132 Column Mode (DECCOLM) Ps = 4 -> Jump (Fast)/Smooth (Slow) Scroll (DECSCLM) Ps = 5 -> Normal/Reverse Video (DECSCNM) Ps = 6 -> Normal/Origin Cursor Mode (DECOM) Ps = 7 -> No Wraparound/Wraparound Mode (DECAWM) Ps = 8 -> Auto-repeat/No Auto-repeat Keys (DECARM) Ps = 9 -> Don't Send/Send MIT Mouse Row & Column on Button Press Ps = 40 -> Disallow/Allow 80 <-> 132 Mode Ps = 41 -> Off/On curses(5) fix Ps = 44 -> Turn Off/On Margin Bell Ps = 45 -> No Reverse-wraparound/Reverse-wraparound Mode Ps = 46 -> Stop/Start Logging Ps = 47 -> Use Normal/Alternate Screen Buffer Ps = 1000 -> mouse bogus sequence (???) Ps = 1001 -> mouse bogus sequence (???) Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt>Statusxterm? privateSequenceCSI Pn tMnemonicDECSLPPDescriptionSet lines per physical page On the multipage VT330, you can issue a DECSLPP (set lines per page) command: Esc [ 2 4 t 6 pages of 24 lines each, single session Esc [ 3 6 t 4 pages of 36 lines each, single session Esc [ 7 2 t 2 pages of 72 lines each, single session Esc [ 1 4 4 t 1 page of 144 lines each, single session Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt> If the number of lines specified is not one of the values supported by the implementation, then the next higher supported number of lines per page is assumed. If the number of lines specified exceeds the maximum number supported, then the maximum number supported is used. The valid Pn values are 24, 25, 36, 41, 42, 48, 52, 53, and 72. The VT510 supports three pages of off-screen memory in the following configurations: 3 pages × 24 lines (default) 2 pages × 25 lines 2 pages × 36 lines 1 pages × 41 lines 1 pages × 42 lines 1 pages × 48 lines 1 pages × 52 lines 1 pages × 53 lines 1 pages × 72 lines Notes on DECSLPP If you switch to a smaller page size, then data that was on the larger page may be split across the smaller pages. To avoid confusion, make sure you set the lines/page before you enter data into page memory. DECSLPP usually does not change the top and bottom scrolling margins. If, however, you change the page size so that the current scrolling margins exceed the new page size, then the terminal resets the margins to the page limits. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSLPP.html> On LA100: Sets form length to Pn lines. Sets top margin and active line to line one. Sets bottom margin to line Pn. Default is 1 SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10StatusDEC private; VT330, printersSequenceCSI Ps tDescriptionDefine non-normal (enhance) attribute [setup level 1] Defines the enhance attribute (see SGR,Non-0) Ps = 0 dim 1 inverse 2 underline [ On a Wyse-75, this chooses which attribute SGR with a non-zero argument produces. ] Source<URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>StatusWyse privateSequenceCSI Pn ... uMnemonicDECSHTSDescriptionSet horizontal tab stops Sets horizontal tab stops at the given values for Pn (up to 16 for the LA100). SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10StatusDEC private; printersSequenceCSI uMnemonicRCPDescriptionRestore cursor position Restore the cursor to the position it occupied at the last time an SCP sequence was received. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Pn ... vMnemonicDECSVTSDescriptionSet vertical tab stops Set vertical tab stops at lines Pn ... (up to 16 on LA100) SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE11StatusDEC private; printersSequenceCSI Ps wMnemonicDECSHORPDescriptionSet horizontal pitch Ps = 0 10.0 cpi, 80 cpl 1 10.0 cpi, 80 cpl 2 12.0 cpi, 96 cpl 3 13.2 cpi 4 16.5 cpi, 132 cpl 5 5.0 cpi 6 6.0 cpi 7 6.6 cpi 8 8.25 cpi 9 15.0 cpi SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108StatusDEC private; printersSequenceCSI Ps xMnemonicDECREQTPARMDescriptionRequest terminal parameters The host sends this sequence to request the VT100 to send a DECREPTPARM sequence back. {Ps} can be either 0 or 1. If 0, the terminal will be allowed to send unsolicited DECREPTPARMs. These reports will be generated each time the terminal exits the SET-UP mode. If {Ps} is 1, then the terminal will only generate DECREPTPARMs in response to a request. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceCSI Psol ; Ppar ; Pnbits ; Pxspd ; Prspd ; Pcmul ; Pflags xMnemonicDECREPTPARMDescriptionReport terminal parameters This sequence is generated by the VT100 to notify the host of the status of selected terminal parameters. The status sequence may be sent when requested by the host (via DECREQTPARM) or at the terminal's discretion. On power up or reset, the VT100 is inhibited from sending unsolicited reports. The meanings of the sequence paramters are: Parameter Value Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------------ {sol} 1 This message is a report. 2 This message is a report, and the terminal is only reporting on request. {par} 1 No parity set 4 Parity set and odd 5 Parity set and even {nbits} 1 8 bits per character 2 7 bits per character {xspd} 0 Speed set to 50 bps -and- 8 Speed set to 75 bps {rspd} 16 Speed set to 110 bps 24 Speed set to 134.5 bps {xspd}= 32 Speed set to 150 bps Transmit 40 Speed set to 200 bps Speed 48 Speed set to 300 bps 56 Speed set to 600 bps {rspd}= 64 Speed set to 1200 bps Recieve 72 Speed set to 1800 bps Speed 80 Speed set to 2000 bps 88 Speed set to 2400 bps 96 Speed set to 3600 bps 104 Speed set to 4800 bps 112 Speed set to 9600 bps 120 Speed set to 19200 bps 128 Speed set to 38400 bps [VT220?] 136 Speed set to 57600 bps [RBComm] 144 Speed set to 115200 bps [RBComm] {cmul} 1 The bit rate multiplier is 16 {flags} 0-15 This value communicates the four switch values in block 5 of SET-UP B, which are only visible to the user when an STP option is installed. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>Sourcevttest-990712 reports.cSource<URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceCSI xMnemonicDGRTCDescriptionRead terminal configuration This command queries for terminal configuration information, such as model ID, keyboard type, etc. Terminal configuration is sent back in the following form: CSI <model ID> ; <status> ; <firmware rev> <keyboard> x where: <model ID> = 52 <status> = 00--15 <firmware rev> = 0--7 <keyboard> is one of: 00: No keyboard 19: Swiss/French 20: Swiss/German 21: Canadian/English 22: Kata Kana 24: Canadian/French 25: United States 26: United Kingdom 27: French 28: German 29: Swedish/Finnish 30: Spanish 31: Danish/Norwegian SourceDasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>StatusData General privateSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 yMnemonicDECTSTDescriptionInvoke confidence test If Ps1 == 2 [VT100] Ps2 is the parameter indicating the test to be done. It is computed by taking the weight indicated for each desired test and adding them together. If Ps2 is 0, no test is performed but the VT100 is reset. Test Weight -------------------------------------------------------------- POST (ROM checksum, RAM NVR, keyboardm and AVO) 1 Data Loop Back (Loopback connector required) 2 EIA Modem Control Test (Loopback connector req.) 4 Repeat Testing until failure 8 Printer loopback test 16 If Ps1 == 6 [LCP01] Ps2 = 1 Powerup self-tests Ps2 = 2 Print a test pattern If Ps1 == 4, Ps2 == 1 [VT125] Further Ps parameters are tests to carry out: 1 VT125 power-up test 2 VT125 computer port data loopback test 3 VT125 auxiliary port data loopback test 4 VT125 display test 5 VT125 video bitmap memory test 9 Repeat selected tests continuously until power-off or failure Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/swedish_vt102_codes.txt>SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppC32,E124 If Ps1 == 4 [VT510] Parameters Ps is the parameter indicating a test to be done. Ps Test 0 "All Tests" (1,2,3,6) 1 Power-Up Self Test 2 RS-232 Port Data Loopback Test 3 Printer Port Loopback Test 4 Speed Select and Speed Indicator Test 5 Reserved - No action 6 RS-232 Port Modem Control Line Loopback Test 7 EIA-423 Port Loopback Test 8 Parallel Port Loopback Test 9 Repeat (Loop On) Other Tests In Parameter String Description After the first parameter, "4", the parameters each select one test. Several tests may be invoked at once by chaining the parameters together separated by semicolons. The tests are not necessarily executed in the order in which they are entered in the parameter string. "ESC # 8" invokes the Screen Alignment test for the VT510. Additionally, after executing the power-up selftest, the terminal displays either the diagnostic messages in the upper left corner of the screen or the "VT510 OK" message in the center of the screen and within a box. Upon receipt of any character except XON or if the user types a keystroke, the screen is cleared. If the terminal is in local mode, then characters from the host are ignored and the message remains visible even if characters are received from the host. DECTST causes a disconnect; therefore, it should not be used in conjunction with a modem. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECTST.html>StatusDEC private; VT100SequenceCSI Ps zMnemonicDECVERPDescriptionSet vertical pitch Ps = 0 6 lpi, 63 lpp 1 6 lpi, 63 lpp 2 8 lpi, 84 lpp 3 12 lpi, 125 lpp 4 2 lpi, 21 lpp 5 3 lpi, 32 lpp 6 4 lpi, 42 lpp SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; printersSequenceCSI Pn zMnemonicSSWDescriptionScreen switch Make the multiscreen number specified by parameter Pn the current one. If Pn refers to an invalid multiscreen number, no action is taken. [ "Multiscreen" seems to be SCOish for "virtual console" ] SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI = zMnemonicCATDescriptionClear all tabs Clear all tab stops. SourceOpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)StatusSCO privateSequenceCSI Ps |MnemonicDECTTCDescriptionSelect transmit termination character Ps Meaning 0 function disabled 1 Form Feed, FF 2 End of Text, ETX 3 End of Transmission, EOT 4 Carriage Return, CR 5 Device Control 3, DC3 SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC27StatusDEC private; VT131 onlySequenceCSI Ps }MnemonicDECPRODescriptionSet protected field attributes Ps Meaning 0 no protection 1 bold protection 4 underline protection 5 blink protection 7 reverse video protection 254 all attributes off protection SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC27StatusDEC private; VT131 onlySequenceCSI Pn SP @MnemonicSLDescriptionScroll left Parameter default value: Pn = 1 SL causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n character positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n line positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data appear to move to the left; where n equals the value of Pn. The active presentation position is not affected by this control function. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.121StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP AMnemonicSRDescriptionScroll right Parameter default value: Pn = 1 SR causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n character positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n line positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data appear to move to the right; where n equals the value of Pn. The active presentation position is not affected by this control function. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.135StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP BMnemonicGSMDescriptionGraphic size modification Parameter default values: Pn1 = 100; Pn2 = 100 GSM is used to modify for subsequent text the height and/or the width of all primary and alternative fonts identified by FONT SELECTION (FNT) and established by GRAPHIC SIZE SELECTION (GSS). The established values remain in effect until the next occurrence of GSM or GSS in the data steam. Pn1 specifies the height as a percentage of the height established by GSS Pn2 specifies the width as a percentage of the width established by GSS SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.55StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP CMnemonicGSSDescriptionGraphic size selection No parameter default value. GSS is used to establish for subsequent text the height and the width of all primary and alternative fonts identified by FONT SELECTION (FNT). The established values remain in effect until the next occurrence of GSS in the data stream. Pn specifies the height, the width is implicitly defined by the height. The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.56StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP DMnemonicFNTDescriptionFont selection Parameter default values: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 =0 FNT is used to identify the character font to be selected as primary or alternative font by subsequent occurrences of SELECT GRAPHIC RENDITION (SGR) in the data stream. Ps1 specifies the primary or alternative font concerned: 0 primary font 1 first alternative font 2 second alternative font 3 third alternative font 4 fourth alternative font 5 fifth alternative font 6 sixth alternative font 7 seventh alternative font 8 eighth alternative font 9 ninth alternative font Ps2 identifies the character font according to a register which is to be established. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.53StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP EMnemonicTSSDescriptionThin space specification No parameter default value. TSS is used to establish the width of a thin space for subsequent text. The established width remains in effect until the next occurrence of TSS in the data stream, see annex C. Pn specifies the width of the thin space. The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.157StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps ... SP FMnemonicJFYDescriptionJustify Parameter default value: Ps = 0 JFY is used to indicate the beginning of a string of graphic characters in the presentation component that are to be justified according to the layout specified by the parameter values, see annex C: 0 no justification, end of justification of preceding text 1 word fill 2 word space 3 letter space 4 hyphenation 5 flush to line home position margin 6 centre between line home position and line limit position margins 7 flush to line limit position margin 8 Italian hyphenation The end of the string to be justified is indicated by the next occurrence of JFY in the data stream. The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). The line limit position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.73StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP GMnemonicSPIDescriptionSpacing increment No parameter default values. SPI is used to establish the line spacing and the character spacing for subsequent text. The established line spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SPI or of SET LINE SPACING (SLS) or of SELECT LINE SPACING (SVS) in the data stream. The established character spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) in the data stream, see annex C. Pn1 specifies the line spacing Pn2 specifies the character spacing The unit in which the parameter values are expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.132StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn ... SP HMnemonicQUADDescriptionQuad Parameter default value: Ps = 0 QUAD is used to indicate the end of a string of graphic characters that are to be positioned on a single line according to the layout specified by the parameter values, see annex C: 0 flush to line home position margin 1 flush to line home position margin and fill with leader 2 centre between line home position and line limit position margins 3 centre between line home position and line limit position margins and fill with leader 4 flush to line limit position margin 5 flush to line limit position margin and fill with leader 6 flush to both margins The beginning of the string to be positioned is indicated by the preceding occurrence in the data stream of either QUAD or one of the following formator functions: FORM FEED (FF), CHARACTER AND LINE POSITION (HVP), LINE FEED (LF), NEXT LINE (NEL), PAGE POSITION ABSOLUTE (PPA), PAGE POSITION BACKWARD (PPB), PAGE POSITION FORWARD (PPR), REVERSE LINE FEED (RI), LINE POSITION ABSOLUTE (VPA), LINE POSITION BACKWARD (VPB), LINE POSITION FORWARD (VPR), or LINE TABULATION (VT). The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). The line limit position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.102StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP IMnemonicSSUDescriptionSelect size unit Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SSU is used to establish the unit in which the numeric parameters of certain control functions are expressed. The established unit remains in effect until the next occurrence of SSU in the data stream. The parameter values are 0 CHARACTER - The dimensions of this unit are device-dependent 1 MILLIMETRE 2 COMPUTER DECIPOINT - 0,035 28 mm (1/720 of 25,4 mm) 3 DECIDIDOT - 0,037 59 mm (10/266 mm) 4 MIL - 0,025 4 mm (1/1 000 of 25,4 mm) 5 BASIC MEASURING UNIT (BMU) - 0,021 17 mm (1/1 200 of 25,4 mm) 6 MICROMETRE - 0,001 mm 7 PIXEL - The smallest increment that can be specified in a device 8 DECIPOINT - 0,035 14 mm (35/996 mm) SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.139StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP JMnemonicPFSDescriptionPage format selection Parameter default value: Ps = 0 PFS is used to establish the available area for the imaging of pages of text based on paper size. The pages are introduced by the subsequent occurrence of FORM FEED (FF) in the data stream. The established image area remains in effect until the next occurrence of PFS in the data stream. The parameter values are (see also annex E): 0 tall basic text communication format 1 wide basic text communication format 2 tall basic A4 format 3 wide basic A4 format 4 tall North American letter format 5 wide North American letter format 6 tall extended A4 format 7 wide extended A4 format 8 tall North American legal format 9 wide North American legal format 10 A4 short lines format 11 A4 long lines format 12 B5 short lines format 13 B5 long lines format 14 B4 short lines format 15 B4 long lines format The page home position is established by the parameter value of SET PAGE HOME (SPH), the page limit position is established by the parameter value of SET PAGE LIMIT (SPL). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.91StatusstandardSequenceCSI ? Ps SP JMnemonicPFSDescriptionPage format selection (DEC extensions) Ps Paper size 20 Tall extended North American letter format 21 Wide extended North Americal letter format 22 Tall extended A4 format 23 Wide extended A4 format SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE110StatusDEC private; LN03SequenceCSI Ps SP KMnemonicSHSDescriptionSelect character spacing Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SHS is used to establish the character spacing for subsequent text. The established spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SHS or of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream. The parameter values are 0 10 characters per 25,4 mm 1 12 characters per 25,4 mm 2 15 characters per 25,4 mm 3 6 characters per 25,4 mm 4 3 characters per 25,4 mm 5 9 characters per 50,8 mm 6 4 characters per 25,4 mm SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.118StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP LMnemonicSVSDescriptionSelect line spacing Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SVS is used to establish the line spacing for subsequent text. The established spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SVS or of SET LINE SPACING (SLS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream. The parameter values are: 0 6 lines per 25,4 mm 1 4 lines per 25,4 mm 2 3 lines per 25,4 mm 3 12 lines per 25,4 mm 4 8 lines per 25,4 mm 5 6 lines per 30,0 mm 6 4 lines per 30,0 mm 7 3 lines per 30,0 mm 8 12 lines per 30,0 mm 9 2 lines per 25,4 mm SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.149StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP MMnemonicIGSDescriptionIdentify graphic subrepertoire No parameter default value. IGS is used to indicate that a repertoire of the graphic characters of ISO/IEC 10367 is used in the subsequent text. The parameter value of IGS identifies a graphic character repertoire registered in accordance with ISO/IEC 7350. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.66StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn ... SP NMnemonicHTSADescriptionCharacter tabulation set absolute The control function CHARACTER TABULATION SET ABSOLUTE (HTSA) which was coded as a control sequence with any number of numeric parameters (CSI Pn ... 02/00 04/14) and the use of which was already declared deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now been removed. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.3Statusstandard; obsoleteSequenceCSI Ps SP OMnemonicIDCSDescriptionIdentify device control string No parameter default value. IDCS is used to specify the purpose and format of the command string of subsequent DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS). The specified purpose and format remain in effect until the next occurrence of IDCS in the data stream. The parameter values are 1 reserved for use with the DIAGNOSTIC state of the STATUS REPORT TRANSFER MODE (SRTM) 2 reserved for Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets (DRCS) according to Standard ECMA-35. The format and interpretation of the command string corresponding to these parameter values are to be defined in appropriate standards. If this control function is used to identify a private command string, a private parameter value shall be used. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.65StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP PMnemonicPPADescriptionPage position absolute Parameter default value: Pn = 1 PPA causes the active data position to be moved in the data component to the corresponding character position on the n-th page, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.96StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP QMnemonicPPRDescriptionPage position forward Parameter default value: Pn = 1 PPR causes the active data position to be moved in the data component to the corresponding character position on the n-th following page, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.98StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP RMnemonicPPBDescriptionPage position backward Parameter default value: Pn = 1 PPB causes the active data position to be moved in the data component to the corresponding character position on the n-th preceding page, where n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.97StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP SMnemonicSPDDescriptionSelect presentation directions Parameter default value: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 = 0 SPD is used to select the line orientation, the line progression, and the character path in the presentation component. It is also used to update the content of the presentation component and the content of the data component. This takes effect immediately. Ps1 specifies the line orientation, the line progression and the character path: 0 line orientation: horizontal line progression: top-to-bottom character path: left-to-right 1 line orientation: vertical line progression: right-to-left character path: top-to-bottom 2 line orientation: vertical line progression: left-to-right character path: top-to-bottom 3 line orientation: horizontal line progression: top-to-bottom character path: right-to-left 4 line orientation: vertical line progression: left-to-right character path: bottom-to-top 5 line orientation: horizontal line progression: bottom-to-top character path: right-to-left 6 line orientation: horizontal line progression: bottom-to-top character path: left-to-right 7 line orientation: vertical line progression: right-to-left character path: bottom-to-top Ps2 specifies the effect on the content of the presentation component and the content of the data component: 0 undefined (implementation-dependent) NOTE This may also permit the effect to take place after the next occurrence of CR, FF or any control function which initiates an absolute movement of the active presentation position or the active data position. 1 the content of the presentation component is updated to correspond to the content of the data component according to the newly established characteristics of the presentation component; the active data position is moved to the first character position in the first line in the data component, the active presentation position in the presentation component is updated accordingly 2 the content of the data component is updated to correspond to the content of the presentation component according to the newly established characteristics of the presentation component; the active presentation position is moved to the first character position in the first line in the presentation component, the active data position in the data component is updated accordingly. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.130StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP TMnemonicDTADescriptionDimension text area No parameter default value. DTA is used to establish the dimensions of the text area for subsequent pages. The established dimensions remain in effect until the next occurrence of DTA in the data stream. Pn1 specifies the dimension in the direction perpendicular to the line orientation Pn2 specifies the dimension in the direction parallel to the line orientation The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.36StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP UMnemonicSLHDescriptionSet line home No parameter default value. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SLH is used to establish at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component the position to which the active presentation position will be moved by subsequent occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), DELETE LINE (DL), INSERT LINE (IL) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream; where n equals the value of Pn. In the case of a device without data component, it is also the position ahead of which no implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SLH is used to establish at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active data position) and lines of subsequent text in the data component the position to which the active data position will be moved by subsequent occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), DELETE LINE (DL), INSERT LINE (IL) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream; where n equals the value of Pn. It is also the position ahead of which no implicit movement of the active data position shall occur. The established position is called the line home position and remains in effect until the next occurrence of SLH in the data stream. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.122StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP VMnemonicSLLDescriptionSet line limit No parameter default value. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SLL is used to establish at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component the position to which the active presentation position will be moved by subsequent occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream if the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD) is equal to 1; where n equals the value of Pn. In the case of a device without data component, it is also the position beyond which no implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SLL is used to establish at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active data position) and lines of subsequent text in the data component the position beyond which no implicit movement of the active data position shall occur. It is also the position in the data component to which the active data position will be moved by subsequent occurrences of CR or NEL in the data stream, if the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD) is equal to 1. The established position is called the line limit position and remains in effect until the next occurrence of SLL in the data stream. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.123StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP WMnemonicFNKDescriptionFunction key No parameter default value. FNK is a control function in which the parameter value identifies the function key which has been operated. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.52StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP XMnemonicSPQRDescriptionSelect print quality and rapidity Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SPQR is used to select the relative print quality and the print speed for devices the output quality and speed of which are inversely related. The selected values remain in effect until the next occurrence of SPQR in the data stream. The parameter values are 0 highest available print quality, low print speed 1 medium print quality, medium print speed 2 draft print quality, highest available print speed SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.134StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP YMnemonicSEFDescriptionSheet eject and feed Parameter default values: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 = 0 SEF causes a sheet of paper to be ejected from a printing device into a specified output stacker and another sheet to be loaded into the printing device from a specified paper bin. Parameter values of Ps1 are: 0 eject sheet, no new sheet loaded 1 eject sheet and load another from bin 1 2 eject sheet and load another from bin 2 ... n eject sheet and load another from bin n Parameter values of Ps2 are: 0 eject sheet, no stacker specified 1 eject sheet into stacker 1 2 eject sheet into stacker 2 ... n eject sheet into stacker n SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.116StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP ZMnemonicPECDescriptionPresentation expand or contract Parameter default value: Ps = 0 PEC is used to establish the spacing and the extent of the graphic characters for subsequent text. The spacing is specified in the line as multiples of the spacing established by the most recent occurrence of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream. The extent of the characters is implicitly established by these control functions. The established spacing and the extent remain in effect until the next occurrence of PEC, of SCS, of SHS or of SPI in the data stream. The parameter values are 0 normal (as specified by SCS, SHS or SPI) 1 expanded (multiplied by a factor not greater than 2) 2 condensed (multiplied by a factor not less than 0,5) SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.90StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP [MnemonicSSWDescriptionSet space width No parameter default value. SSW is used to establish for subsequent text the character escapement associated with the character SPACE. The established escapement remains in effect until the next occurrence of SSW in the data stream or until it is reset to the default value by a subsequent occurrence of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED (CR/LF), CARRIAGE RETURN/FORM FEED (CR/FF), or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C. Pn specifies the escapement. The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). The default character escapement of SPACE is specified by the most recent occurrence of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or of SELECT SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream if the current font has constant spacing, or is specified by the nominal width of the character SPACE in the current font if that font has proportional spacing. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.140StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP \MnemonicSACSDescriptionSet additional character separation Parameter default value: Pn = 0 SACS is used to establish extra inter-character escapement for subsequent text. The established extra escapement remains in effect until the next occurrence of SACS or of SET REDUCED CHARACTER SEPARATION (SRCS) in the data stream or until it is reset to the default value by a subsequent occurrence of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED (CR LF) or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C. Pn specifies the number of units by which the inter-character escapement is enlarged. The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.107StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps ... SP ]MnemonicSAPVDescriptionSelect alternative presentation variants Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SAPV is used to specify one or more variants for the presentation of subsequent text. The parameter values are 0 default presentation (implementation-defined); cancels the effect of any preceding occurrence of SAPV in the data stream 1 the decimal digits are presented by means of the graphic symbols used in the Latin script 2 the decimal digits are presented by means of the graphic symbols used in the Arabic script, i.e. the Hindi symbols 3 when the direction of the character path is right-to-left, each of the graphic characters in the graphic character set(s) in use which is one of a left/right-handed pair (parentheses, square brackets, curly brackets, greater-than/less-than signs, etc.) is presented as "mirrored", i.e. as the other member of the pair. For example, the coded graphic character given the name LEFT PARENTHESIS is presented as RIGHT PARENTHESIS, and vice versa 4 when the direction of the character path is right-to-left, all graphic characters which represent operators and delimiters in mathematical formulae and which are not symmetrical about a vertical axis are presented as mirrored about that vertical axis 5 the following graphic character is presented in its isolated form 6 the following graphic character is presented in its initial form 7 the following graphic character is presented in its medial form 8 the following graphic character is presented in its final form 9 where the bit combination 02/14 is intended to represent a decimal mark in a decimal number it shall be presented by means of the graphic symbol FULL STOP 10 where the bit combination 02/14 is intended to represent a decimal mark in a decimal number it shall be presented by means of the graphic symbol COMMA 11 vowels are presented above or below the preceding character 12 vowels are presented after the preceding character 13 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts, including the LAM-ALEPH ligature but excluding all other Arabic ligatures 14 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts, excluding all Arabic ligatures 15 cancels the effect of parameter values 3 and 4 16 vowels are not presented 17 when the string direction is right-to-left, the italicized characters are slanted to the left; when the string direction is left-to-right, the italicized characters are slanted to the right 18 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts is not used, the graphic characters - including the digits - are presented in the form they are stored (Pass-through) 19 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts is not used, the graphic characters- excluding the digits - are presented in the form they are stored (Pass-through) 20 the graphic symbols used to present the decimal digits are device dependent 21 establishes the effect of parameter values 5, 6, 7, and 8 for the following graphic characters until cancelled 22 cancels the effect of parameter value 21, i.e. re-establishes the effect of parameter values 5, 6, 7, and 8 for the next single graphic character only. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.108StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP ^MnemonicSTABDescriptionSelective tabulation No parameter default value. STAB causes subsequent text in the presentation component to be aligned according to the position and the properties of a tabulation stop which is selected from a list according to the value of the parameter Ps. The use of this control function and means of specifying a list of tabulation stops to be referenced by the control function are specified in other standards, for example ISO 8613-6. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.144StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP _MnemonicGCCDescriptionGraphic character combination Parameter default value: Ps = 0 GCC is used to indicate that two or more graphic characters are to be imaged as one single graphic symbol. GCC with a parameter value of 0 indicates that the following two graphic characters are to be imaged as one single graphic symbol; GCC with a parameter value of 1 and GCC with a parameter value of 2 indicate respectively the beginning and the end of a string of graphic characters which are to be imaged as one single graphic symbol. NOTE GCC does not explicitly specify the relative sizes or placements of the component parts of a composite graphic symbol. In the simplest case, two components may be "half-width" and side-by-side. For example, in Japanese text a pair of characters may be presented side-by-side, and occupy the space of a normal-size Kanji character. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.54StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP `MnemonicTATEDescriptionTabulation aligned trailing edge No parameter default value. TATE causes a character tabulation stop calling for trailing edge alignment to be set at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. TATE causes the replacement of any tabulation stop previously set at that character position, but does not affect other tabulation stops. A text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by TATE will be positioned so that the (trailing edge of the) first graphic character of the string is placed at the tabulation stop. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.153StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP aMnemonicTALEDescriptionTabulation aligned leading edge No parameter default value. TALE causes a character tabulation stop calling for leading edge alignment to be set at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. TALE causes the replacement of any tabulation stop previously set at that character position, but does not affect other tabulation stops. A text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by TALE will be positioned so that the (leading edge of the) last graphic character of the string is placed at the tabulation stop. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.152StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP bMnemonicTACDescriptionTabulation aligned centred No parameter default value. TAC causes a character tabulation stop calling for centring to be set at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. TAC causes the replacement of any tabulation stop previously set at that character position, but does not affect other tabulation stops. A text string centred upon a tabulation stop set by TAC will be positioned so that the (trailing edge of the) first graphic character and the (leading edge of the) last graphic character are at approximately equal distances from the tabulation stop. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.151StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP cMnemonicTCCDescriptionTabulation centred on character No parameter default value for Pn1 Parameter default value: Pn2 = 32 TCC causes a character tabulation stop calling for alignment of a target graphic character to be set at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn1, and the target character about which centring is to be performed is specified by Pn2. TCC causes the replacement of any tabulation stop previously set at that character position, but does not affect other tabulation stops. The positioning of a text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by TCC will be determined by the first occurrence in the string of the target graphic character; that character will be centred upon the tabulation stop. If the target character does not occur within the string, then the trailing edge of the first character of the string will be positioned at the tabulation stop. The value of Pn2 indicates the code table position (binary value) of the target character in the currently invoked code. For a 7-bit code, the permissible range of values is 32 to 127; for an 8-bit code, the permissible range of values is 32 to 127 and 160 to 255. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.155StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP dMnemonicTSRDescriptionTabulation stop remove No parameter default value. TSR causes any character tabulation stop at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component to be cleared, but does not affect other tabulation stops. n equals the value of Pn. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.156StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP eMnemonicSCODescriptionSelect character orientation Parameter default value: Ps = 0 SCO is used to establish the amount of rotation of the graphic characters following in the data stream. The established value remains in effect until the next occurrence of SCO in the data stream. The parameter values are 0 0 deg 1 45 deg 2 90 deg 3 135 deg 4 180 deg 5 225 deg 6 270 deg 7 315 deg Rotation is positive, i.e. counter-clockwise and applies to the normal presentation of the graphic characters along the character path. The centre of rotation of the affected graphic characters is not defined by this Standard. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.110StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP fMnemonicSRCSDescriptionSet reduced character separation Parameter default value: Pn = 0 SRCS is used to establish reduced inter-character escapement for subsequent text. The established reduced escapement remains in effect until the next occurrence of SRCS or of SET ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SEPARATION (SACS) in the data stream or until it is reset to the default value by a subsequent occurrence of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED (CR/LF) or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C. Pn specifies the number of units by which the inter-character escapement is reduced. The unit in which the parameter values are expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.136StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP gMnemonicSCSDescriptionSet character spacing No parameter default value. SCS is used to establish the character spacing for subsequent text. The established spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SCS, or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream, see annex C. Pn specifies the character spacing. The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.112StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP hMnemonicSLSDescriptionSet line spacing No parameter default value. SLS is used to establish the line spacing for subsequent text. The established spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SLS or of SELECT LINE SPACING (SVS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream. Pn specifies the line spacing. The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.124StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP iMnemonicSPHDescriptionSet page home No parameter default value. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SPH is used to establish at line position n in the active page (the page that contains the active presentation position) and subsequent pages in the presentation component the position to which the active presentation position will be moved by subsequent occurrences of FORM FEED (FF) in the data stream; where n equals the value of Pn. In the case of a device without data component, it is also the position ahead of which no implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SPH is used to establish at line position n in the active page (the page that contains the active data position) and subsequent pages in the data component the position to which the active data position will be moved by subsequent occurrences of FORM FEED (FF) in the data stream; where n equals the value of Pn. It is also the position ahead of which no implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur. The established position is called the page home position and remains in effect until the next occurrence of SPH in the data stream. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.131StatusstandardSequenceCSI Pn SP jMnemonicSPLDescriptionSet page limit No parameter default value. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SPL is used to establish at line position n in the active page (the page that contains the active presentation position) and pages of subsequent text in the presentation component the position beyond which the active presentation position can normally not be moved; where n equals the value of Pn. In the case of a device without data component, it is also the position beyond which no implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SPL is used to establish at line position n in the active page (the page that contains the active data position) and pages of subsequent text in the data component the position beyond which no implicit movement of the active data position shall occur. The established position is called the page limit position and remains in effect until the next occurrence of SPL in the data stream. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.133StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP kMnemonicSCPDescriptionSelect character path No parameter default values. SCP is used to select the character path, relative to the line orientation, for the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and subsequent lines in the presentation component. It is also used to update the content of the active line in the presentation component and the content of the active line (the line that contains the active data position) in the data component. This takes effect immediately. Ps1 specifies the character path: 1 left-to-right (in the case of horizontal line orientation), or top-to-bottom (in the case of vertical line orientation) 2 right-to-left (in the case of horizontal line orientation), or bottom-to-top (in the case of vertical line orientation) Ps2 specifies the effect on the content of the presentation component and the content of the data component: 0 undefined (implementation-dependent) NOTE This may also permit the effect to take place after the next occurrence of CR, NEL or any control function which initiates an absolute movement of the active presentation position or the active data position. 1 the content of the active line in the presentation component (the line that contains the active presentation position) is updated to correspond to the content of the active line in the data component (the line that contains the active data position) according to the newly established character path characteristics in the presentation component; the active data position is moved to the first character position in the active line in the data component, the active presentation position in the presentation component is updated accordingly 2 the content of the active line in the data component (the line that contains the active data position) is updated to correspond to the content of the active line in the presentation component (the line that contains the active presentation position) according to the newly established character path characteristics of the presentation component; the active presentation position is moved to the first character position in the active line in the presentation component, the active data position in the data component is updated accordingly. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.111StatusstandardSequenceCSI Ps SP pMnemonicDECSSCLSDescriptionSet Scroll Speed Select how fast lines appear on the screen. Parameters Ps indicates the scroll speed and lines per second. Ps Scroll Speed Lines per Second 0, 1, 2, 3 or none Smooth 2 (default) 9 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 Smooth 4 18 9 Jump As fast as received Description This is a user preference feature. If the User Features Locked is enabled, then the scroll speed cannot be changed by this control function. The escape sequence DECSCLM can change the scroll speed between Smooth 2 and Jump scroll. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSSCLS.html>StatusDEC private; VT510SequenceCSI Ps SP qMnemonicDECSCUSRDescriptionSet cursor style Where ps can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 meaning Blinking Block, Blinking Block, Steady Block, Blink Underline, Steady Underline, respectively. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT520SequenceCSI Ps SP rMnemonicDECSKCVDescriptionSet Key Click Volume Set the keyclick volume. Parameters Ps indicates the selection of the click volume. Ps Key Click Volume 1 Off 2, 3, 4 Low 5, 6, 7, 8, 0 or none High (Default) Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSKCV.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI ... SP sMnemonicDECNSDescriptionNew sheet Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL3SequenceCSI Ps SP tMnemonicDECSWBVDescriptionSet Warning Bell Volume Set the warning bell volume. Parameters Ps indicates the selection of the click volume. Ps Bell Volume 1 Off 2, 3, 4 Low 5, 5, 7, 8, 0 or none High (default) Description This sequence is used to adjust the warning bell volume (for errors and receipt of Ctrl G). Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSWBV.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps SP uMnemonicDECSMBVDescriptionSet Margin Bell Volume Set the margin bell volume. Parameters Ps indicates the selection of the bell volume. Ps Key Click Volume 1, 0 or none Off (default) 2, 3, 4 Low 5, 6, 7, 8 High Description This sequence is used to adjust the warning bell volume, which sounds as the current position nears the right margin. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSMBV.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps SP vMnemonicDECSLCKDescriptionSet Lock Key Style Allow user to select a Lock key style. Parameters Ps indicates the selection of the lock style. Ps Lock Style Meaning 1, 0 or None Cap Lock (Default) Lock alpha keys on main keypad in uppercase. 2 Shift Lock Lock alpha and numeric keys on main keypad in shifted setting. 3 Reverse Lock Lock numeric keys in shifted setting, but lock alpha keys in lowercase setting. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSLCK.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI ... SP wMnemonicDECSITFDescriptionSelect input tray failover Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL3SequenceCSI ... SP xMnemonicDECSDPMDescriptionSet Duplex Print Mode Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL3SequenceCSI ... SP zMnemonicDECVPFSDescriptionVariable page format select Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL3SequenceCSI ... SP {MnemonicDECSSSDescriptionSet sheet size Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL3SequenceCSI ... SP |MnemonicDECRVECDescriptionDraw relative vector Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL3SequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP }MnemonicDECKBDDescriptionKeyboard Language Selection Select a national keyboard language on either a VT keyboard or an Enhanced PC keyboard. Ps1 denotes a keyboard type (layout): VT or enhanced PC. Ps1 Keyboard Layout 0, 1, or None VT 2 Enhanced PC Ps2 indicates the national keyboard language. Ps2 Keyboard Language (VT/PC) 0, 1 or None North American 2 British 3 Belgian (Flemish) 4 French Canadian 5 Danish 6 Finnish 7 German 8 Dutch 9 Italian 10 Swiss French 11 Swiss German 12 Swedish 13 Norwegian 14 French 15 Spanish 16 Portuguese 19 Hebrew 22 Greek 28 Canadian (English) 29 Turkish Q/Turkish 30 Turkish F 31 Hungarian 33 Slovak 34 Czech 35 Polish 36 Romanian 38 SCS 39 Russian 40 Latin American Description The first selective parameter, Ps1, denotes a keyboard type, VT layout or Enhanced PC keyboard layout. The second parameter, Ps2, indicates the national keyboard language. Selecting a new keyboard language automatically initializes the keyboard character set. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECKBD.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps SP ~MnemonicDECTMEDescriptionTerminal Mode Emulation Select a terminal emulation mode. Parameters The Ps parameter selects the terminal emulation mode as follows: Ps Terminal Mode 0, 1, or none VT500 (VT Level 4) 2 VT100 3 VT52 4 VT420 PCTerm 5 WYSE 60/160 6 WYSE 60/160 PCTerm 7 WYSE 50+ 8 WYSE 150/120 9 TVI 950 10 TVI 925 11 TVI 910+ 12 ADDS A2 13 SCO Console Description This sequence allows you to select the terminal emulation mode. After any mode change is made, a soft reset is performed. Notes on DECTME Printer operations are not affected or halted by a change in mode. A soft reset is always performed as a result of a mode change between VT modes. Exception: Entering VT52 mode using DECANM does not cause a soft reset from VT100 mode. DECANM and DECSCL can also change the VT operating modes. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECTME.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI !DescriptionDetermining RIP support The ESC[! is the code that RIP supporting BBS's use to determine whether your terminal has RIP (Remote Imaging Protocol) support. If so, then your terminal returns a string to the remote side in the form "RIPScript version x.xx" or some such thing. This is probably why you have been receiving that code. I found the RIPscript 1.54 spec at ftp.telegrafix.com. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>StatusTeleGrafix private; clashes with ECMA-48SequenceCSI ! pMnemonicDECSTRDescriptionSoft terminal reset sets terminal to power-up default states Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt> "VT220 Programmer Pocket Guide" EK-VT220-HR-001, page 33 (keeps screen) Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>StatusDEC private; VT220SequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ! sMnemonicDECFILDescriptionRight justification 0 <= Pn1 <= 1535 (1/720-inch units, 1/120-inch increments) 0 <= Pn2 <= 255 (number of printing characters) 0 <= Pn3 <= 1535 (1/720-inch units, 1/120-inch increments) 0 <= Pn4 <= 255 (number of spaces) SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE102StatusDEC private; LQP02SequenceCSI Ps ! vMnemonicDECASFCDescriptionAutomatic sheet feeder control Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL2SequenceCSI Pn ! wMnemonicDECUNDDescriptionSelect undeline character Select underline character Pn other than default character. SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90StatusDEC private; LQP02SequenceCSI Ps ! xMnemonicDECPTSDescriptionPrintwheel table select Ps == 0,1 Select printwheel table 1 Ps == 2 Select printwheel table 2 SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90StatusDEC private; LQP02SequenceCSI Pn ! yMnemonicDECSSDescriptionSelect spacing Set horizontal spacing increment (proportional spacing mode). 6 <= Pn <= 768 (decipoint units, 1/720 inch) SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE91,E99StatusDEC private; LQP02SequenceCSI Ps1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ! |MnemonicDECVECDescriptionDraw vector Ps1 Meaning 0 Draw X line 1 Draw Y line Pn1 = X start value Pn2 = Y start value Pn4 = line length Pn5 = line width Units are decipoints or pixels according to SSU. SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107StatusDEC private; LN03SequenceCSI ... ! }MnemonicDECFINDescriptionDocument finishing Instructs the device whether to change the offset at which paper is delivered to the output tray. Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; LQP03SequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 " pMnemonicDECSCLDescriptionSet compatibility level CSI 6 1 " p -> Level 1 (VT100) compatibility CSI 6 2 " p -> Level 2 (VT200) compatibility, 8-bit controls CSI 6 2 ; 0 " p -> ditto CSI 6 2 ; 1 " p -> ditto, 7-bit controls CSI 6 2 ; 2 " p -> ditto, 8-bit controls Ps1 = 63 selects Level 3 (VT300) Ps1 = 64 selects Level 4 (VT400) Source<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html> VT220 Ref ManualSourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT200SequenceCSI Ps " qMnemonicDECSCADescriptionSelect character attributes Ps Action 0 All attributes off (does not apply to SGR) 1 Designate character as "non-erasable" by DECSEL/DECSED. (Attribute on) 2 Designate character "erasable" by DECSEL/DECSED. (Attribute off) NOTE: A parameter value of 0 implies the default which is attributes off (erasable by DECSEL/DECSED). A parameter value of 2 is an explicit request for this attribute to be off (erasable by DECSEL/DECSED). Souce: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html> StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 " sMnemonicDECPWADescriptionPage width alignment Pn1 specifies the left edge of the print arera relatiove to the left edge of platen. Pn2 specifies width of print area. Pn1 and Pn2 are measured in units of 1/12 inch. SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE42StatusDEC private; printersSequenceCSI Ps " tMnemonicDECSRFRDescriptionSelect Refresh Rate Selects a refresh rate. Parameters Ps indicates the refresh rate selection. On the VT510, only 60 Hz and 72 Hz are supported. Ps Refresh Rate 1 50 Hz 2 60 Hz 3, 0 or none Greater or equal to 70 Hz Description The terminal can be set to refresh its display at the power line frequency in electrically noisy environments. Normally this is unnecessary. The 72 Hz refresh rate is preferred to minimize flicker. Because of a hardware limitation, overscan and 72 Hz refresh rate cannot co-exist when the lines per screen is set to 42 or 53. See DECSNLS for details. If a combination of lines per screen, refresh rate, and overscan become invalid, then the terminal returns to a valid combination in this order of priority: 1. Lines Per Screen 2. Refresh Rate 3, Overscan Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSRFR.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 " uMnemonicDECSTRLDescriptionSet Transmit Rate Limit Limit the rate of character transmission according to the selected rate. Parameters Ps1 indicates the key type. Ps1 Key Type 1, 0 or none All Keys 2 Graphic Key 3 Function Key Ps2 indicates the characters per second. Ps2 Characters Per Second 1, 0 or none 150 CPS 2 50 CPS 3 30 CPS Description When enabled, the terminal limits the rate at which it transmits the answerback, CPR, DA, TSI, and DSR messages, as well as the keyboard keys, and any other characters transmitted from the terminal. All messages and keystrokes are transmitted according to the selected "character per second" rate. You can select different transmit rates for graphic keys and function keys, which usually transmit more than one byte at a time. The transmit rate limit function can be enabled and disabled through the DECXRLM control function. When disabled, all messages and keystrokes are transmitted as fast as possible without any delay between characters. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSTRL.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI " vMnemonicDECRQDEDescriptionRequest Displayed Extent The host sends a DECRQDE to the terminal requesting how much of the current page is displayed on the screen for the active session. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRQDE.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Ph ; Pw ; Pml ; Pmt ; Pmp " wMnemonicDECRPDEDescriptionReport Displayed Extent The terminal sends this control function in response to a request displayed extent (DECRQDE) sequence. DECRPDE indicates how much of the current page is displayed on the screen. DECRPDE indicates how much of the screen has to display the current page. Ph is the number of lines of the current page displayed excluding the status line. Pw is the number of columns of the current page displayed. Pml is the column number displayed in the left-most column. Pmt is the line number displayed in the top line. Pmp is the page number displayed. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRPDE.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI ... " zMnemonicDECDENDescriptionSelect density ESC [ 0 " z selects default (draft) density ESC [ 1 " z selects draft density ESC [ 2 " z selects letter density (medium or high density depending on DPS). Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE46StatusDEC private; printersSequenceCSI Ps ; " { String STMnemonicDECRFSDescriptionRequest font status Ps Meaning 0 Send status of all fonts 1 Send status of ROM resident, down line loaded, and cartridge 2 Send status of memory bytes remaining for host loaded fonts String = type family and font Response (DECFSR) is: CSI 2 " nnn ST Where nnn = number of bytes remaining in memory SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107StatusDEC private; LN03 Response is: ESC [ ? Pn ; Pm SP D SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE124StatusDEC private; LCP01SequenceCSI Pn $ pMnemonicDECRQMDescriptionRequest mode settings Pn is a mode number, as passed to SM or RM. It can include a leading ? to specify a DEC private mode. The terminal returns CSI Pn ; Pn2 $ y, where Pn2 is 1 if the mode is in the set state. SourcePaul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in comp.terminals <7t76qq$23q$1@nnrp1.deja.com>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps $ qMnemonicDECSDDTDescriptionSelect Disconnect Delay Time Select an appropriate disconnect delay time. Parameters Ps indicates the selection for the disconnect delay time. Ps Disconnect Delay Time 1 None 2 60 ms 3, 0 or none 2 seconds Description The disconnect delay feature determines the time allowed before the terminal disconnects from the communications line when the Received Line Signal Detect (RLSD) is lost. All countries except the United Kingdom should use the 2 seconds delay. The 60 ms delay is for use in the United Kingdom. If the terminal detects a loss of carrier and if the user has selected "no disconnect," then the terminal ignores RLSD (CD) after the beginning of the connection. If the user tries to disconnect and reconnect the line, then the terminal checks if RLSD is asserted before granting the connection. Once it is connected, the terminal ignores the loss of carrier. In this case, the disconnect should be done on DSR going off. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSDDT.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Ps1 ... Psn $ rMnemonicDECCARADescriptionChange attributes in rectangular area Change the visual attributes for characters in a specified area of display memory the characters themselves remain unchanged. The DECSACE control function is used to determine whether all or just some of the character positions are affected. The parameters are: Pn1 Top line Pn2 Left column Pn3 Bottom line Pn4 Right column SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0 Ps1 ... Psn are standard SGR character attributes. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>StatusDEC private; VT420SequenceCSI Ps $ sMnemonicDECSPRTTDescriptionSelect Printer Type Allow users to select a printer type that matches their environment. Parameters Ps indicates the selection of the printer type. Ps Printer Type 1, 0 or none DEC ANSI (default) 2 IBM ProPrinter 3 DEC + IBM Description Printer type "DEC ANSI" indicates a printer type that is capable of recognizing the attached Digital ANSI conforming escape sequences. "ProPrinter" indicates an attached printer type that recognizes the IBM ProPrinter escape sequences. If the attached printer is an ANSI-compatible printer that has the IBM ProPrinter emulation feature, then select "DEC + IBM." Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSPRTT.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Ps1 ; ... ; Psn $ tMnemonicDECRARADescriptionReverse attributes in rectangular area Reverse the visual attributes for characters in a specified area of display memorythe characters themselves remain unchanged. The DECSACE control function is used to determine whether all or just some of the character positions are affected. The parameters are: Pn1 Top line Pn2 Left column Pn3 Bottom line Pn4 Right column Ps1...Psn Normal SGR character attributes SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT420SequenceCSI Ps ; ... $ uMnemonicDECRQTSRDescriptionRequest terminal state report Ps = 1 => Host request for a terminal state report (returns DECTSR) Ps = 2 => Host request for color table report. In this case the second parameter signifies the colour space; 0 or 1 indicates HLS (the default) and 2 indicates RGB. The reply is DECCTR. If the terminal doesn't understand, it responds with DCS 0 $ s ST. RBComm always returns DCS 1 $ ST (no state information returned) Source<URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ; Pn6 ; Pn7 ; Pn8 $ vMnemonicDECCRADescriptionCopy rectangular area Copy a rectangular area of display memory from one part of page memory to another. Characters and their attributes remain unchanged. The parameters Pn1 through Pn5 describe the area to be copied: Pn1 Top line Pn2 Left column Pn3 Bottom line Pn4 Right column Pn5 Page number The parameters <n6> through <n8> describe where the area should be copied: Pn6 Top line Pn7 Left column Pn8 Page number SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Ps $ wMnemonicDECRQPSRDescriptionRequest presentation state report /* * From Kermit 3.13 & VT220 pocket guide * * Request CSI 1 $ w cursor information report See DECCIR for response CSI 2 $ w tab stop report See DECTABSR for response Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>Sourcevttest-990712 vt420.cStatusDEC private; VT300SequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 $ xMnemonicDECFRADescriptionFill rectangular area Fill an area in display memory with a specified character. The fill character takes on the visual attributes set by the last SGR control function, not the attributes of the characters that it replaces. Current line attributes (for example, the attributes that specify double-wide, double-high characters) remain unchanged. The parameters are: Pn1 Decimal code of fill character Pn2 Top line Pn3 Left column Pn4 Bottom line Pn5 Right column SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pn ; Ps $ yMnemonicDECRPMDescriptionReport Mode - Terminal To Host Reports the terminal mode in response to a request mode (DECRQM) function. In the response DECRPM informs the host if a certain mode is set (SM--Set Mode) or reset (RM--Reset Mode). There are two versions of DECRPM, for ANSI and DEC modes. Reporting ANSI Modes CSI Pa ; Ps $ y 3/n ; 3/11 Ps 3/n $ 2/4 y 7/9 Reporting DEC Modes CSI 9/11 ? 3/15 Pd 3/n ; 3/11 Ps 3/n $ 2/4 y 7/9 Parameters Pa Table 5–6 lists the values for Pa. Pd indicates which DEC mode the terminal is reporting on. Table 5–6 lists the values for Pd. Ps indicates the setting of the mode. The Ps values are the same for the ANSI and DEC versions. Ps Mode Setting 0 Mode not recognized 1 Set 2 Reset 3 Permanently set 4 Permanently reset DescriptionReport mode settings You can query setting of this with CSI ? 67 $ p response CSI ? 67 ; Ps $ y where Ps : 0 = unkown mode 1 = set 2 = reset 3 = permanently set 4 = permanently reset This query is possible if terminal supports terminal interrogation commands (== VT400 series or better). Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; VT300SequenceCSU Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 $ zMnemonicDECERADescriptionErase rectangular area Erase the characters (and their visual attributes) in the specified rectangular area and replace each one with a space (decimal 32). Line attributes (for example, the attributes that specify double-wide, double-high characters) are not erased. The areas to erase are: Pn1 Top line Pn2 Left column Pn3 Bottom line Pn4 Right column SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 $ {MnemonicDECSERADescriptionSelective erase rectangular area Erase all erasable characters from a specified rectangular area in page memory; a space character replaces erased character positions. The DECSERA control function does not change: * Visual attributes set by the select graphic rendition (SGR) function. * Protection attributes set by DECSCA. * Line attributes. The parameters are: Pn1 Top line Pn2 Left column Pn3 Bottom line Pn4 Right column SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Ps $ |MnemonicDECSCPPDescriptionSet columns per page The VT330 also implements the DECSCPP (set columns per page) as the preferred new way; it does not reset the scrolling regions or clear page memory as DECCOLM does. Esc [ $ | sets each page to 80 columns Esc [ 0 $ | sets each page to 80 columns Esc [ 8 0 $ | sets each page to 80 columns Esc [ 1 3 2 $ | sets each page to 132 columns Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>StatusDEC private; VT330 SequenceCSI Ps $ }MnemonicDECSASDDescriptionSelect active status display Ps = 0 -> none Ps = 1 -> status This means CSI 0 $ } selects the main display, and CSI 1 $ } selects the status line. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; VT320SequenceCSI Ps $ ~MnemonicDECSSDTDescriptionSelect Status Display (Line) Type This control function lets the host select the type of status line displayed. Available in: VT Level 4 mode only Default: Indicator status display Parameters Ps indicates which status line the host selects: Ps Status Line Selected 0 (default) No status line 1 Indicator status line 2 Host-writable status line Notes on DECSSDT If you select no status line (Ps = 0), then the terminal uses the line as an additional user window line to display data. If you change from an indicator to a host-writable status line, then the new host-writable status line is empty. When you select the host-writable status line, most of the control functions that affect the main display also affect the status line. The following list describes the exceptions to the rule: Control Function Action Select character set (SCS) Both the main display and status line use the same character set. Cursor position controls Only the column parameters in cursor-positioning commands operate in the status line. ANSI mode (DECANM) Ignored if received in the status line. Set conformance level (DECSCL) Exits the status line. Scrolling mode (DECSCLM) Affects the main display and the status line. Soft terminal reset (DECSTR) Exits the status line. Insert/replace mode (IRM) Affects the main display and the status line. Hard terminal reset (RIS) Erases and exits the status line. Tab stops Affect the main display and status line. Autowrap mode (DECAWM) Affects the main display and status line. DECSSDT does not affect the status line type displayed in Set-Up. In Set-Up, the terminal always uses the indicator status line. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSSDT.html>StatusDEC private; VT320SequenceCSI Pn & qMnemonicDECSNCDescriptionSet number of copies Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL3SequenceCSI & uMnemonicDECRQUPSSDescriptionUser-Preferred Supplemental Set Applications can ask for the current user-preferred supplemental set. The terminal responds with the user-preferred supplemental set (DECAUPSS) sequence. Host Request (DECRQUPSS) The host requests the current user-preferred supplemental set by sending the [above] sequence. Terminal Responses The terminal uses the DECAUPSS device control string to report the current user-preferred supplemental set (UPSS). The terminal sends DECAUPSS in response to a DECRQUPSS sequence. The terminal can send one of the following reports: Control Sequence UPSS DCS 0 ! u % 5 ST The user-preferred supplemental set is DEC Supplemental Graphic. DCS 1 ! u A ST The user-preferred supplemental set is ISO Latin-1 supplemental. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRQUPSS.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pe ; Pb ; Pr ; Pc ; Pp & wMnemonicDECLRPDescriptionLocator report When a selected trigger event occurs such as a button press or release, the terminal transmits a locator position report as follows. Pe is the event code Pb is the button code Pr is the row coordinate Pc is the column coordinate Pp is the third coordinate (page number) Pe, the event code indicates what event caused this report to be generated. The following event codes are defined: 0 - request, the terminal received an explicit request for a locator report, but the locator is unavailable 1 - request, the terminal received an explicit request for a locator report 2 - left button down 3 - left button up 4 - middle button down 5 - middle button up 6 - right button down 7 - right button up 8 - fourth button down 9 - fourth button up 10 - locator outside filter rectangle Pb is the button code, ASCII decimal 0-15 indicating which buttons are down if any. The state of the four buttons on the locator correspond to the low four bits of the decimal value, "1" means button depressed 0 - no buttons down 1 - right 2 - middle 4 - left 8 - fourth Pr is the row coordinate of the locator position in the page, encoded as an ASCII decimal value. If Pr is omitted, the locator position is undefined (outside the terminal window for example). Pc is the column coordinate of the locator position in the page, encoded as an ASCII decimal value. If Pc is omitted, the locator position is undefined (outside the terminal window for example). Pp is the page coordinate of the locator position encoded as an ASCII decimal value. The page coordinate may be omitted if the locator is on page one (the default). Each locator report includes both the specific transition which caused this event, and the current button state. This allows software to determine what event just occured and which buttons are down without keeping track of previous events or button state. In a multiprocess shared locator environment, an application may not know the previous button state. This dual reporting also allows applications to recover from lost locator reports. Each locator event generates a single report. In the rare situation where two events occur simultaneously (within a single sampling period), the terminal will report this as two separate events. The order of reporting shall be by increasing event code number (left button first). Locator events are queued in the keyboard input silo just like keystrokes. Each locator event occupies one position in the silo (the keyboard silo currently must have at least 9 positions). If the input silo becomes full, the locator and keyboard are locked until there is again room in the silo. The sequential order of keystroke and locator events is strictly maintained. It is the responsibility of the host to accept data fast enough to avoid locking the locator unintentionally. The limited buffering inside the terminal gives the host a little more time to process locator events smoothly. When the keyboard is locked, the "wait" indicator on the keyboard turns on. The keyboard is automatically locked any time the keyboard input silo is full. The keyboard can be locked explicitly using the keyboard action mode (KAM) control function. When the locator is locked, the terminal continues to track the locator, but the input cursor changes shape to appear as a wristwatch (or other shape indicating to wait). The wristwatch cursor indicates that locator button transitions will be ignored, but allows the user to continue positioning in anticipation of the locator being unlocked. The locator is automatically locked any time the input silo is full. Locator-ahead, analogous to keyboard type-ahead is supported by having each report include the locator position at the time of the event, and maintaining the sequential order of keystroke and locator events. A final implication of using the keyboard silo to buffer text locator events is that locator and keyboard input should be associated with the same session at all times. The session to receive these events is sometimes called the "active session" or "input focus". In a multi-session windowing environment, the input cursor is allowed to roam freely over the entire screen in response to locator movement. The input cursor is never occluded when locator reporting is enabled in one or more sessions. Each session enables locator reporting independently. The following cases describe the locator interaction with session viewports and scroll regions. 1. The input cursor is within the active session's viewport. Pressing a button on the locator sends alocator report when enabled. 2. The input cursor is inside the active session's viewport, but outside the range of defined coordinates for that session. Pressing a button on the locator will generate a report with omitted coordinates (position undefined). An example would be when the input cursor is outside the active scrolling region, and the origin mode has been set to relative. To use the locator to adjust scroll margins, the origin mode must be absolute. 3. The input cursor is not contained in any viewport. Pressing a button on the locator will have no effect. To support "pop up" menus anywhere on the screen, the entire screen must be a viewport for at least one session. 4. The input cursor is within a viewport of a session which is not the active session. Pressing a button on the locator will normally make the session containing the input cursor the active session (possibly changing the occlusion order of viewports, and the shape of the locator). This case is the responsibility of the "window manager" which is free to define its own user interface. Two recommendations are: (1) No locator report should be sent to the previous active session, since the locator is not in its viewport; and (2) If locator reporting is enabled in the new session, a locator report should not be transmitted to avoid application side affects when selecting another window. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>StatusDEC private; VT340?SequenceCSI ... & xMnemonicDECESDescriptionEnable session management Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI ... ' qMnemonicDECSBCADescriptionSelect bar code attributes Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL2SequenceCSI Pt ; Pl ; Pb ; Pr ' wMnemonicDECEFRDescriptionEnable filter rectangle Filter Rectangles add filtered movement events to the list of locator transitions that can generate reports. Pt - Top boundary of filter rectangle Pl - Left boundary of filter rectangle Pb - Bottom boundary of filter rectangle Pr - Right boundary of filter rectangle The DECEFR control sequence defines the coordinates of a filter rectangle, and activates it. Anytime the locator is detected to be outside a filter rectangle, an outside rectangle event is generated and the rectangle is disabled. Filter rectangles are always treated as "one-shot" events. Defining a new rectangle re-activates it. Applications can re-define the rectangle at any time even if its already active. If a rectangle which does not contain the locator is specified, the terminal will generate an outside rectangle report immediately and deactivate it. Pt, Pl, Pb, and Pr are in coordinates units specified by the last DECELR sequence. The filter rectangle includes the boundaries (similar to other rectangular area operations). The origin is coordinate pair 1:1 in the upper left corner. If any parameters are omitted, they are defaulted to the current locator position. Sending DECEFR with no parameters will cause the application to be notified for any locator movement ("unfiltered movement event"). DECELR always cancels any previous filter rectangle definition. This gaurantees that when an application enables locator reports, there will never be an outstanding filter rectangle. If a filter rectangle lies on the edge of the defined coordinate space for the active session, and the locator crosses that edge, the rectangle may be triggered to send a report with omitted coordinates (locator position undefined). If the active session receives a filter rectangle with explicit coordinates while the locator is outside the defined coordinate space, the rectangle will be triggered to send a report with omitted coordinates. If the active session receives a filter rectangle with omitted coordinates (that is, use the current position) while the locator is outside the defined coordinate space (position undefined), the rectangle will be triggered the next time the locator is within the defined coordinate space. If a session which is not the active session receives a filter rectangle with explicit coordinates, it should trigger immediately with position undefined. If a session which is not the active session receives a rectangle with omitted coordinates, it should trigger the next time the locator is within the defined coordinate space for that session, which cannot happen until the session becomes active. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>StatusDEC private; VT340?SequenceCSI Ps ; Pu ' zMnemonicDECELRDescriptionEnable locator reports Locator reporting can be selectively enabled from the host using a DEC private control sequence. When disabled (the power up default), the locator cursor does not appear, and the locator buttons are inactive. When enabled, the locator cursor is visible, and the terminal tracks the locator locally with no host intervention. Individual locator events such as locator button transitions or movement may be programmed to send locator reports to the host. Ps may assume the following values 0 locator disabled (default) 1 locator reports enabled 2 one shot (allow one report, then disable) Pu specifies the coordinate units for locator reports 0 (or omitted) default to character cells 1 device physical pixels 2 character cells One shot mode is provided for applications that desire simple graphics input similar to Tektronix GIN mode (no unsolicited reports). If parameter value 2 is selected, the next trigger event that occurs will generate a single locator report. No further locator reports will occur (the locator will be disabled), until another DECELR sequence is received. The coordinate units for locator position reports may be selected to either of two coordinate systems used by terminal software at the lowest level. Physical pixels is the "least common denominator", and is useful for computing sixel positions. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>StatusDEC private; VT340?SequenceCSI P...P ' {MnemonicDECSLEDescriptionSelect locator events The locator events which are allowed to generate unsolicited reports may be individually selected using the Select Locator Events control. The locator is capable of reporting both up and down transitions for those situations where the exact sequence of button activiations is significant. This control allows application software to select which events it wants reported. P...P is one or more selective parameters which may assume the following values: 0 respond only to explicit host requests (default, also cancels any pending filter rectangle) 1 report button down transitions 2 do not report button down transitions 3 report button up transitions 4 do not report button up transitions Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>StatusDEC private; VT340?SequenceCSI Ps ' |MnemonicDECRQLPDescriptionRequest locator position The host may explicitly request a locator position report any time locator reporting is enabled (DECELR). Upon receiving such a request, the terminal will immediately send a single locator report (DECLRP) with event code 1 indicating the current locator position. If the session receiving the request is the active session, but the locator is not within the defined coordinate range for that session, the terminal will respond with omitted coordinates (locator position undefined). If the session receiving the request is not currently active (the locator is being used in another session), the report will specify event code 0 (locator unavailable). Locator state from the active session should not be made available to inactive sessions. If the locator is disabled (DECELR), the terminal should still respond with event code 0 (to avoid timing out the application). Ps: 0 (or omitted) default to 1 1 transmit a single DECLRP locator report all others ignored Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>StatusDEC private; VT340?SequenceCSI Pn ' }MnemonicDECICDescriptionInsert column This control function inserts one or more columns into the scrolling region, starting with the column that has the cursor. Available in: VT Level 4 mode only Parameters Pn is the number of columns to insert. Default: Pn = 1. Description As columns are inserted, the columns between the cursor and the right margin move to the right. DECIC inserts blank columns with no visual character attributes. DECIC has no effect outside the scrolling margins. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECIC.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pn ' ~MnemonicDECDCDescriptionDelete column This control function deletes one or more columns in the scrolling region, starting with the column that has the cursor. Available in: VT Level 4 mode only Pn is the number of columns to delete. Default: Pn = 1. Description As columns are deleted, the remaining columns between the cursor and the right margin move to the left. The terminal adds blank columns with no visual character attributes at the right margin. DECDC has no effect outside the scrolling margins. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/chapter4.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Ps ) pMnemonicDECSDPTDescriptionSelect Digital Printed Data Type Allow users to match the characters printed to the character sets the DEC ANSI conforming printer is capable of supporting. Parameters Ps denotes the selection for printed data type. Ps Printed Data Type 1, 0 or none Print National Only (Default) 2 National and Line Drawing 3 Print Multinational 4 Print All Characters Description This sequence takes effect only when a ProPrinter or DEC printer with ProPrinter emulation mode is attached. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSDPT.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pn * pMnemonicDECSPPCSDescriptionSelect ProPrinter Character Set Allow users to match the characters printed to the character sets the IBM ProPrinter is capable of supporting. Parameters Pn denotes the code page numbers for ProPrinter supported character sets. Pn Printer 210 PC Greek 220 PC Spanish 437 PC International 850 PC Multilingual 852 PC Slavic (Latin 2) 857 PC Turkish 860 PC Portuguese 862 PC Hebrew 863 PC French-Canadian 865 PC Danish 866 PC Cyrillic Description This sequence takes affect only when a ProPrinter or DEC printer with ProPrinter emulation mode is attached. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSPPCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pr * qMnemonicDECSRCDescriptionSecure Reset Confirmation The terminal returns this report to the host if the Pr parameter was included in the last secure reset (DECSR) control function. DECSRC report indicates that the secure reset operation was successful. Parameters Pr is the number from 0 to 16383 that was included in the corresponding secure reset sequence. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSRC.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 * rMnemonicDECSCSDescriptionSelect Communication Speed Select a communication speed for a communication line. Parameters Ps1 indicates the communication line. Ps1 Comm Line Type 1, 0 or none Host Transmit 2 Host Receive 3 Printer 4 Modem Hi 5 Modem Lo Ps2 indicates the communication speed. Ps2 Speed Ps2 Speed 0 or none default 6 9600 1 300 7 19200 2 600 8 38400 3 1200 9 57600 4 2400 10 76800 5 4800 11 115200 The default value depends on the type of communication line. Communication Line Default Communication Speed Host Transmit 9600 Host Receive Receive=transmit Printer 4800 Modem Hi Ignore Modem Lo Ignore Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSCS.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 ; Ps4 * sMnemonicDECSFCDescriptionSelect Flow Control Select a flow control scheme for the communication port or printer port. Parameters Ps1 determines which port is to be assigned the flow control scheme. Ps1 Port Type 1, 0 or none Comm Port 2 Printer Port Ps2 indicates the flow method. On the VT510, the transmit side or the receive side of the communication line can select different or the same flow control methods. Ps2 Transmit or Receive 1, 0 or none Transmit 2 Receive 3 Transmit and Receive Ps3 is for the flow control type. When the terminal is in PCTerm mode, XPC replaces XON/XOFF on the receive side. Ps3 Flow Control Type 1, 0 or none XON/XOFF or XPC (XPC is for receive only) 2 DTR 3 Both 4 None Ps4 sets the flow control threshold. Ps4 Flow Control Threshold 1, 0 or none Low (64) 2 High (768) The terminal uses "low" and "high" to denote the flow control threshold. If Low is selected, then the terminal sends an XOFF (if in software flow control) or lower DTR (in hardware flow control) to notify the host of holding transmission when the input buffer reaches 64 bytes. If High is selected, then 768 bytes is the flow control threshold. "High" flow control threshold is not available for the printer port, which always uses low (64 bytes) as the flow control threshold. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSFC.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 * uMnemonicDECSCPDescriptionSelect Communication Port Select the port to be used for printer or host connection. Parameters Ps1 indicates the port selection for a printer connection. The VT510 enables you to select from a Centronics parallel port. Ps1 Printer Port 1 Parallel port 2 Comm1 3 Comm2 Ps2 indicates the port selection for a host connection. Since the VT510 is a single session terminal, the host session can connect to the Comm1 port or the Comm2 port. Ps2 Session 1 1 Comm1 2 Comm2 Comm1 is an RS232, 25-pin, serial port. Comm2 is an MMJ serial port. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSCP.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps * xMnemonicDECSACEDescriptionSelect attribute change extent Select which character positions within a rectangular area can have their attributes changed or reversed. The DECSACE control function affects the rectangular area control functions for changing and reversing attributes (DECCARA and DECRARA). The Ps parameter specifies what character positions are affected. 0 or 1 indicates a stream of character positions that begins in the first position specified in the DECCARA or DECRARA control function, and ends with the second one that is specified. A 2 indicates a rectangular area of character positions; the DECCARA and DECRARA control functions specify the upper left and lower right corners of the area. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ; Pn6 * yMnemonicDECRQCRADescriptionRequest checksum of rectangular area Request a memory checksum of a rectangular area on a specified page. The terminal returns a checksum report (DECCKSR) in response. DECRQCRA also works on the status line. Parameters: Pn1 A numeric label you give to identify the checksum request (DECCKSR returns this number). Pn2 The number of the page on which the rectangular area is located. If Pn2 is 0 or omitted, the terminal ignores the remaining parameters and reports a checksum for all pages in page memory. If <n2> is more than the number of pages, Reflection does a checksum on the last page. Pn3 to Pn6 define the area to be checksummed: Pn3 Top row Pn4 Right column Pn5 Bottom row Pn6 Left column If Pn3 .. Pn6 are omitted, the entire page is checksummed. The co-ordinates are affected by DECOM. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pn * zMnemonicDECINVMDescriptionInvoke Macro Invoke a stored macro. Pn is the macro ID number used in DECDMAC. If Pn is not associated with a particular macro, Reflection ignores this control function. If a macro definition includes control functions, these functions remain in effect after the macro is invoked. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pn * {MnemonicDECMSRDescriptionMacro space report DECMSR is the terminal's response to a DSR from the host. DECMSR indicates the number of bytes available for macro definitions. Parameters Pn = number of bytes / 16, rounded down. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECMSR.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pn * |MnemonicDECSNLSDescriptionSet Lines Per Screen Set the maximum lines that can be displayed on the screen. Description The terminal supports three different font heights, which allows 26, 42, or 53 data lines to be displayed on the screen or 25, 41, or 52 data lines to be displayed on the screen, plus a status line. The different character fonts are: 80/26 132/26 80/42 132/42 80/53 132/53 Cell Width 10 6 10 6 10 6 Cell Height 16 16 10 10 8 8 Notes on DECSNLS When 26 Line per Screen/72 Hz/Overscan is selected, the cell size changes from 10 × 16 (6 × 16) to 10 × 13 (6 × 13). When 42 lines or 53 lines are selected, users can only select either overscan feature or 72 Hz refresh rate, not both. Valid Combinations The terminal has the following valid combinations: Lines Per Screen Refresh Rate Overscan 26 72 Hz No 26 72 Hz Yes 26 60 Hz No 26 60 Hz Yes 42 72 Hz No 42 60 Hz No 42 60 Hz Yes 53 72 Hz No 53 60 Hz No 53 60 Hz Yes If an invalid combination is selected, the terminal automatically returns to a valid combination according to the following priority order: Lines Per Screen Refresh Rate Overscan Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSNLS.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pk1 ; Pf1 ... Pkn ; Pfn * }MnemonicDECLFKCDescriptionLocal function key control This control function lets you select the action performed by some of the local function keys on the top row of the keyboard: Pk Function VT Keyboard Enhanced PC Keyboard 1 Hold F1 Scroll Lock 2 Print F2 Print Screen 3 Set-Up F3 Caps Lock/Print Screen You can have the key perform its local function, send a function key sequence to the host, or do nothing. This control function is useful for: Simplifying the keyboard for novice users Disabling features that are not compatible with the application, such as local printing Parameters Pkn is a number from 0 to 4 that corresponds to the local function key affected (F1 to F4). A Pkn value of 0 means that all four keys (F1 through F4) are affected. Pfn controls the action of the local function key specified by the corresponding Pkn value. Pfn Meaning VT Mode PCTerm Mode 0 Selects the default function of the key. Local print Scan code 1 The key performs its local function either Print Local Print shifted, unshifted, or with the Ctrl key. 2 The unshifted key sends its function key Function Key Scan Code sequence to the host. The key sends nothing when pressed with Shift or Ctrl. 3 The key is disabled. Disabled Does not exist Description DECLFKC can accept any number of parameter pairs. The terminal executes the parameters in the order in which it receives them. Note on DECLFKC Applications cannot disable the F5 (Break) key using this command. This restriction is required for secure systems, which ensures that the operator has control of the communication line. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECLFKC.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pr + pMnemonicDECSRDescriptionSecure Reset This control function sets the terminal to its power-up state. DECSR lets applications know the exact state of the terminal before any attempted operations. You can use DECSR to guarantee the terminal state for secure connections. DECSR is similar to RIS, but does not perform a disconnect from the host. Parameters Pr is a optional random number from 0 to 16383. If Pr is included, then the terminal sends a confirmation (DECSRC) with this number. DECSR Actions Clears user-defined keys. Clears soft character sets. Clears the screen and all off-screen page memory. Returns the cursor to the upper-left corner of the first page. Resets the scrolling margins. Resets origin mode (DECOM) to absolute. Sets visual character attributes to normal. Sets the selective erase (DECSCA) attribute to not selectively erasable. Sets all character sets to the defaults (G0, G1, G2, G3, GL, GR). Erases macro memory. Erases the paste buffer. Reinitializes the keyboard state by: Clearing the keyboard input buffer Canceling compose sequences Resetting the keyboard to send its default codes (in NVR) Unlocking the keyboard (resetting KAM) DECSR replaces all set-up parameters to their saved settings or power-up default values. If you include the optional Pr parameter, then the terminal returns a secure reset report to the host. Notes on DECSR DECSR works in all conformance levels (level 1 or higher). DECSR works in display controls mode (CRM) and causes the terminal to exit this mode. DECSR does not work in VT52 mode or printer controller mode. The host software must explicitly exit these modes. You can send DECSR to an attached printer if the terminal is in printer controller mode. The terminal buffers DECSR like any other incoming data. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSR.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI Pf1 ; Pc1 ; ... Pfn ; Pcn + qMnemonicDECELFDescriptionEnable local functions This control function lets you enable or disable the keys used to perform several local terminal functions: cutting and pasting text, panning, and resizing windows. DECELF is useful for: Simplifying the keyboard for novice users Letting the corresponding keys send position codes to the host when key position mode (DECKPM) is set Disabling features that are not compatible with the application Parameters Pfn is a number that specifies the local function affected. Pfn Local Functions Affected Default Setting 0 (default) All local functions listed for 1, 2, and 3. 1 Copy and paste keys, including The keys are enabled. F1 (Hold), Select, Remove, and Insert Here. 2 Panning keys, including Ctrl with The keys are enabled. [up], [down], [left], or [right]. 3 Window resizing keys, including: The keys are enabled. Ctrl and Shift with [up] or [down] keys. Pcn controls the action of the local function specified by the corresponding Pfn value. Pcn Meaning 0 Selects the default setting of the local function. In VT mode, the default setting is enabled. In PC Term mode, the default setting is disabled. 1 Enables the local function. The associated keys perform the local function and cannot send position codes to the host. 2 Disables the local function. The associated keys do not perform the local function and may send position codes to the host. Description DECELF can accept any number of parameter pairs. The terminal executes the parameters in the order in which it receives them. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECELF.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Pm1 ; Pf1 ... Pmn ; Pfn + rMnemonicDECSMKRDescriptionSelect Modifier Key Reporting Program the modifier keys to send extended keyboard reports when pressed or released. DECSMKR only works when key position mode (DECKPM) is set. Applications can use DECSMKR to gain more control over the keyboard by monitoring the action of each modifier key. Parameters Pmn is the key number that corresponds to the modifier key affected. A Pmn value of 0 selects all modifier keys. Pmn Key Default Function 1 left Shift Local shift. 2 right Shift Local shift. 3 Lock Local lock. 4 Ctrl Local control. 5 left Alt Function Report up or down transitions. 6 right Alt Function Report up or down transitions. 7 left Compose Character Local compose. 8 right Compose Character Local compose. Pfn controls the action of the modifier key specified by the corresponding Pmn value. Pfn Meaning 0 Selects the default function of the key. 1 The key performs its default modifier function. 2 The key sends an extended keyboard report when pressed or released. The key does not modify other keystrokes or perform its default function. 3 The key is disabled. Description DECSMKR can accept any number of parameter pairs. The terminal executes the parameters in the order in which it receives them. Applications cannot change the function of the F5 (Break) key. This restriction is required for secure systems to ensure that the operator has control of the communication line. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSMKR.html>StatusDEC private; VT400SequenceCSI ... + vMnemonicDECMMDescriptionMemory management Source<URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>StatusDEC private; PPL3SequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 ; Ps4 + wMnemonicDECSPPDescriptionSet Port Parameter Configures communication parameters for either a communication port or a printer port. Parameters Ps1 determines which port is to be configured. Ps1 Port Selection 1, 0 or none Comm Port 2 Printer Port Ps2 determines the data bit. Ps2 Data Bit 1, 0 or none 8 bits 2 7 bits Ps3 determines the parity. Ps3 Parity Ps3 Parity 1, 0 or none No Parity 5 Odd Parity, Unchecked 2 Even Parity 6 Mark Parity 3 Odd Parity 7 Space Parity 4 Even Parity, Unchecked Ps3 selections 4 and 5 are not available for the printer port. Ps4 determines the stop bit. Ps4 Stop Bit 1, 0 or none 1 bit 2 2 bits Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECSPP.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI + xMnemonicDECRQPKFMDescriptionProgram Key Free Memory Inquiry Inquire as to the amount of free memory for programmable key operations. Upon receiving of this sequence, the terminal responds with DECPKFMR. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRQPKFM.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 + yMnemonicDECPKFMRDescriptionProgram key free memory report Report the approximate free memory space for program key operations. Parameters Ps1 denotes the total memory space in bytes that is reserved for the programmable keys. The total memory available is 804 bytes, hence the Ps1 value is "804." Ps2 denotes the memory space that is available at the time DECRQPKFM is received, depending on the number of bytes left in decimal format. A "0" indicates that no memory is left for any key programming operation; in which case, any attempt to program the keys will fail. Description The VT510 reports this sequence upon receiving DECRQPKFM from the host. Note on DECPKFMR The free bytes reported by Ps2 in this command represents only the approximate amount of memory available, because additional memory is used by the firmware data structure to program the key definitions. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECPKFMR.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps + zMnemonicDECPKADescriptionProgram key action Allow changes to programmable keys, which affects all the keys on the keyboard in all the VT modes except in VT52 mode. Parameters Ps This sequence has two functions: 1. Lock the keys from redefinition. 2. Restore the definitions of the keys either from the factory default or the NVR. If set to "1," the parameter determines whether the keys will be locked. Any attempt to program keys will be invalid. If the keys are not locked, then the keys are available for further definition either through Set-Up or control functions DECPFK, DECPAK, DECCKD, and DECUDK. But if "Lock UDK" is enabled by DECUDK, then the attempt to program the keys does not take effect. (Refer to DECUDK--User Defined Keys for details.) Once locked, keys can only be unlocked through Set-Up. There is no host control function that can unlock the keys. If the parameter Ps is set to 2, then all the keys and keys/modifiers combination restore to their factory default states. Refer to DECCKD--Copy Key Default if restoring defaults for a single key and key/modifier combination. If the parameter Ps is set to 3, all saved settings of the keys and keys/modifiers combination are recalled from the NVR. If the keys are locked for further definition, then restore and recall operations are not valid. Ps1 Program Key Action 0 or none None 1 Locks keys and keys/modifiers from further definition 2 Restores factory defaults of all the keys and their keys/modifiers 3 Recalls saved keys definition Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECPKA.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 , pMnemonicDECLTODDescriptionLoad Time of Day This sequence loads the time of day into the terminal's memory. When loaded, the time of day is displayed in the Status line if the Status line is enabled. Parameters Ps1 specifies the hour, which is a 2-digit decimal number between 00 and 23. The default value is 8, indicating 8:00 a.m. Ps2 specifies the minutes, which is a 2-digit decimal number between 00 and 59. The default value is 00, indicating 8:00 a.m. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECLTOD.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps , qMnemonicDECTIDDescriptionSelect Terminal ID Select a terminal ID. Parameters Ps denotes the ID type. Ps ID Type 0 VT100 1 VT101 2 VT102 5 VT220 7 VT320 9 VT420 10 VT510 Description This sequence selects the Primary DA Response ("Terminal ID") transmitted by the terminal. DECTID has no effect when the terminal is in VT52 mode. The VT510 supports the following DA1 responses: VT100 ID ESC [ ? 1; 2 c VT101 ID ESC [ ? 1; 0 c VT102 ID ESC [ ? 6 c VT220 ID (N.A.) CSI ? 62; 1; 2; 7; 8 c VT220 ID (Intnl) CSI ? 62; 1; 2; 7; 8; 9 c VT320 ID (N.A.) CSI ? 63; 1; 2; 7; 8 c VT320 ID (Intnl) CSI ? 63; 1; 2; 7; 8; 9 c VT420 ID (N.A.) CSI ? 64; 1; 2; 7; 8; 9; 15; 18; 21 c VT420 ID (Intnl) CSI ? 64; 1; 2; 7; 8; 9; 15; 18; 21 c VT510 ID Reference function DA1 The default ID is "VT510." Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECTID.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps , uMnemonicDECRQKTDescriptionKey Type Inquiry The host issues a DECRQKT to the terminal for the key definition of a function or alphanumeric key. Upon receiving the request, the terminal reports using DECRPKT. Ps is a decimal number representing the target key's station number. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRQKT.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 , vMnemonicDECRPKTDescriptionReport key type DECRPKT (from the terminal) is a response to a key type inquiry (DECRQKT). Parameters Ps1 indicates is the target key's station number. Ps2 indicates Ps2 Key Type 0 Alphanumeric 1 Function Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRPKT.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps1 ; Ps2 , wMnemonicDECRQKDDescriptionRequest Key Definition DECRQKD allows you to inquire about the terminal's definition of: A function key or a function key combined with a single modifier key. An alphanumeric key combined with all of its available modifier keys. The terminal reports the function key definition with DECRPFK, and the alphanumeric key definition with DECRPAK. Parameters Ps1 indicates is the target key's station number. When inquiring for an alphanumeric key definition, Ps2 is ignored by the terminal. DECRPAK always reports a hexadecimal string in which each hexadecimal code represents a value transmitted by pressing a combination of the target key and a modifier key. The whole sequence is ignored if you enter an invalid key/modifier. See DECRPAK. When inquiring for a function key definition, Ps2 represents: Ps2 Description 0, 1 or none Normal 2 Shift 3 Alt 4 Alt + Shift 5 Control 6 Shift + Control 7 Alt + Control 8 Alt + Control + Shift Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRQKD.html>StatusDEC privateSequenceCSI Ps / yDescriptionxwsh command xwsh command. The first parameter to this escape sequence is the particular command described in the table that follows. Each command has different numbers of arguments which are described below. 2 Textport init. Reset xwsh to be 40 rows by 80 columns. Reset the colors to the default colors. Reset any graphics rendition. Clear out the retain buffer. Home the cursor. 3 Push the window. Depending on the window manager, this may or may not have any affect. 4 Pop the window. Depending on the window manager, this may or may not have any affect. 14 History init. Clear out the retain buffer. Home the cursor. 16 Reset bindable function keys. 15 Initialize bindable function keys to defaults. 101 Set the text color by using a 3.3 compatible index. 102 Set the page color by using a 3.3 compatible index. 103 Set the bold color by using a 3.3 compatible index. 104 Set the cursor page color by using a 3.3 compatible index. 111 Set the selection colors by using 3.3 compatible indices. This sequence takes three parameters. The first is 111. The second parameter is the selection text color, the third is the selection page color. 203 Set the window size by row and column. This sequence takes three parameters. The first is 203. The second parameter is the number of rows to use. The third parameter is the number of columns to use. 204 Set the window size, in pixels. This sequence takes three parameters. The first is 204. The second parameter is the new width. The third parameter is the new height. The width and height are rounded up to the nearest font boundaries. 205 Set the window position, in pixels. The lower left corner of the display is specified as 0,0. SourceIRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)StatusSGI privateSequenceST or ESC \MnemonicSTDescriptionString terminator ST is used as the closing delimiter of a control string opened by APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND (APC), DEVICE CONTROL STRING (DCS), OPERATING SYSTEM COMMAND (OSC), PRIVACY MESSAGE (PM), or START OF STRING (SOS). SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.143StatusstandardSequenceOSC or ESC ]MnemonicOSCDescriptionOperating system command OSC is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for operating system use. The command string following may consist of a sequence of bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on the relevant operating system. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.89StatusstandardSequenceOSC 0 ; txt BEL (or ST)DescriptionSet icon name and window title SourceLinux console_codes(4)Statusxterm privateSequenceOSC 1 ; txt BEL (or ST)DescriptionSet icon name SourceLinux console_codes(4)Statusxterm privateSequenceOSC 2 ; txt BEL (or ST)DescriptionSet window title SourceLinux console_codes(4)Statusxterm privateSequenceOSC 4 6 ; name BEL (or ST)DescriptionSet log file Change log file to name (normally disabled by a compile-time option) SourceLinux console_codes(4)Statusxterm privateSequenceOSC 5 0 ; fn BEL (or ST)DescriptionSet font SourceLinux console_codes(4)Statusxterm privateSequenceOSC P nrrggbbDescriptionSet palette set palette, with parameter given in 7 hexadecimal digits after the final P :-(. Here n is the color (0-16), and rrggbb indicates the red/green/blue values (0-255). SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusLinux private; should be terminated with STSequenceOSC RDescriptionReset palette SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusLinux private; should be terminated with STSequencePM or ESC ^MnemonicPMDescriptionPrivacy message PM is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for privacy message use. The command string following may consist of a sequence of bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on the relevant privacy discipline. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.94StatusstandardSequenceAPC or ESC _MnemonicAPCDescriptionApplication program command APC is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for application program use. The command string following may consist of bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on the relevant application program. SourceECMA-48 8.3.2StatusstandardSequenceAPC : ppp mm STMnemonicDECEKBDDescriptionExtended Keyboard Report This control function is a report that provides applications with more complete keystroke information. Each report consists of an ISO key position code and the current state of the eight modifier keys—pressed or released. Parameters ppp is a three-character ISO key position name, for example C01. For keys that occupy more than one position in the ISO key position map, the VT510 uses the largest lower-left position. The position for the space bar is A02; Return is C13. mm are two ASCII hexadecimal digits that represent the state of the modifier keys. The terminal represents the state of each modifier key as a bit in an 8-bit binary number. A bit value of 1 means the key is pressed, and a bit value of 0 means the key is not pressed. mm is the hexadecimal equivalent of the resulting 8-bit binary number. The following table shows the order in which keys are represented in the binary number, and their corresponding hexadecimal values when pressed. The least significant bit represents the left Shift key. The most significant bit represents the right Compose Character key. For example, 000000102 means that the right Shift key is pressed. The hexadecimal value for 000000102 is 0216. mm Key 01 left Shift (Least significant bit) 02 right Shift 04 Lock 08 Ctrl 10 left Alt Function 20 right Alt Function 40 left Compose Character 80 right Compose Character (Most significant bit) Description The terminal only sends extended key position reports when key position mode (DECKPM) is set. The terminal uses the following rules when sending extended key reports: A single report may contain more than one keystroke. In this case, each keystroke is separated by a slash (/). The terminal sends the control string (APC ... ST) when a modifier key changes, or to separate keystroke data from other terminal reports. The terminal only sends the modifier key state when it changes in the first keystroke after an APC character. The terminal sends repeated key position reports as a single repeat character, period (.). Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECEKBD.html>StatusDEC privateModes (for SM and RM)Mode1MnemonicGATMDescriptionGuarded area transfer mode GUARD (reset): Only the contents of unguarded areas in an eligible area are transmitted or transferred. ALL (set): The contents of guarded as well as of unguarded areas in an eligible area are transmitted or transferred. NOTE No control functions are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.7StatusstandardMode2MnemonicKAMDescriptionKeyboard action mode ENABLED (reset): All or part of the manual input facilities are enabled to be used. DISABLED (set): All or part of the manual input facilities are disabled. NOTE No control functions are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.11StatusstandardMode3MnemonicCRMDescriptionControl representation mode CONTROL (reset): All control functions are performed as defined; the way formator functions are processed depends on the setting of the FORMAT EFFECTOR ACTION MODE (FEAM). A device may choose to image the graphical representations of control functions in addition to performing them. GRAPHIC (set): All control functions, except RESET MODE (RM), are treated as graphic characters. A device may choose to perform some control functions in addition to storing them and imaging their graphical representations. NOTE All control functions, except RM, are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.2StatusstandardMode4MnemonicIRMDescriptionInsertion replacement mode REPLACE (reset): The graphic symbol of a graphic character or of a control function, for which a graphical representation is required, replaces (or, depending upon the implementation, is combined with) the graphic symbol imaged at the active presentation position. INSERT (set): The graphic symbol of a graphic character or of a control function, for which a graphical representation is required, is inserted at the active presentation position. NOTE Only control functions for which a graphical representation is required are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.10StatusstandardMode5MnemonicSRTMDescriptionStatus report transfer mode NORMAL (reset): Status reports in the form of DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS) are not generated automatically. DIAGNOSTIC (set): Status reports in the form of DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS) are included in every data stream transmitted or transferred. NOTE No control functions are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.16StatusstandardMode6MnemonicERMDescriptionErasure mode PROTECT (reset): Only the contents of unprotected areas are affected by an erasure control function. ALL (set): The contents of protected as well as of unprotected areas are affected by an erasure control function. NOTE Control functions affected are: EA, ECH, ED, EF, EL. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.4StatusstandardMode7MnemonicVEMDescriptionLine editing mode FOLLOWING (reset): If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a line insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and of the following lines in the presentation component to be shifted in the direction of the line progression; a line deletion causes the contents of the lines following the active line to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line progression. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a line insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that contains the active data position) and of the following lines in the data component to be shifted in the direction of the line progression; a line deletion causes the contents of the lines following the active line to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line progression. PRECEDING (set): If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a line insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and of the preceding lines to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line progression; a line deletion causes the contents of the lines preceding the active line to be shifted in the direction of the line progression. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a line insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that contains the active data position) and of the preceding lines to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line progression; a line deletion causes the contents of the lines preceding the active line to be shifted in the direction of the line progression. NOTE Control functions affected are: DL, IL. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.19StatusstandardMode8MnemonicBDSMDescriptionBi-directional support mode EXPLICIT (reset): Control functions are performed in the data component or in the presentation component, depending on the setting of the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM). IMPLICIT (set): Control functions are performed in the data component. All bi-directional aspects of data are handled by the device itself. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.1StatusstandardMode9MnemonicDCSMDescriptionDevice component select mode PRESENTATION (reset): Certain control functions are performed in the presentation component. The active presentation position (or the active line, where applicable) in the presentation component is the reference position against which the relevant control functions are performed. DATA (set): Certain control functions are performed in the data component. The active data position (or the active line, where applicable) in the data component is the reference position against which the relevant control functions are performed. NOTE Control functions affected are: CPR, CR, DCH, DL, EA, ECH, ED, EF, EL, ICH, IL, LF, NEL, RI, SLH, SLL, SPH, SPL. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.3StatusstandardMode10MnemonicHEMDescriptionCharacter editing mode FOLLOWING (reset): If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a character insertion causes the contents of the active presentation position and of the following character positions in the presentation component to be shifted in the direction of the character path; a character deletion causes the contents of the character positions following the active presentation position to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the character path. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a character insertion causes the contents of the active data position and of the following character positions in the data component to be shifted in the direction of the character progression; a character deletion causes the contents of the character positions following the active data position to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the character progression. PRECEDING: If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a character insertion causes the contents of the active presentation position and of the following character positions in the presentation component to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the character path; a character deletion causes the contents of the character positions following the active presentation position to be shifted in the direction of the character path. If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a character insertion causes the contents of the active data position and of preceding character positions in the data component to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the character progression; a character deletion causes the contents of the character positions preceding the active data position to be shifted in the direction of the character progression. NOTE Control functions affected are: DCH, ICH. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.9StatusstandardMode11MnemonicPUMDescriptionPositioning unit mode CHARACTER (reset): The unit for numeric parameters of the positioning format effectors is one character position. SIZE (set): The unit for numeric parameters of the positioning format effectors is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU). NOTE 1 Control functions affected are: CUB, CUD, CUF, CUU, HPA, HPB, HPR, HVP, SLH, SLL, SSU, VPA, VPB, VPR.. NOTE 2 As the default parameter value of the control function SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU) is CHARACTER, this mode is redundant and should no longer be used. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. F.4.1Statusstandard; deprecatedMode12MnemonicSRMDescriptionSend/receive mode MONITOR (reset): Data which are locally entered are immediately imaged. SIMULTANEOUS: Local input facilities are logically disconnected from the output mechanism; only data which are sent to the device are imaged. NOTE No control functions are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.15StatusstandardMode13MnemonicFEAMDescriptionFormat effector action mode EXECUTE (reset): Formator functions are performed immediately and may be stored in addition to being performed. STORE (set): Formator functions are stored but not performed. In this case, the specified action is intended to be performed by another device when the associated data are transmitted or transferred. NOTE Control functions affected are: BPH, BS, CR, DTA, FF, FNT, GCC, GSM, GSS, HPA, HPB, HPR, HT, HTJ, HTS, HVP, JFY, NEL, PEC, PFS, PLD, PLU, PPA, PPB, PPR, PTX, QUAD, RI, SACS, SAPV, SCO, SCS, SGR, SHS, SLH, SLL, SLS, SPD, SPI, SPQR, SRCS, SRS, SSU, SSW, STAB, SVS, TAC, TALE, TATE, TBC, TCC, TSS, VPA, VPB, VPR, VTS. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.5StatusstandardMode14MnemonicFETMDescriptionFormat effector transfer mode INSERT (reset): Formator functions may be inserted in a data stream to be transmitted or in data to be transferred to an auxiliary input/output device. EXCLUDE: No formator functions other than those received while the FORMAT EFFECTOR ACTION MODE (FEAM) is set to STORE are included in a transmitted data stream or in data transferred to an auxiliary input/output device. NOTE No control functions are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.6StatusstandardMode15MnemonicMATMDescriptionMultiple area transfer mode SINGLE (reset): Only the contents of the selected area which contains the active presentation position are eligible to be transmitted or transferred. MULTIPLE (set): The contents of all selected areas are eligible to be transmitted or transferred. NOTE No control functions are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.12StatusstandardMode16MnemonicTTMDescriptionTransfer termination mode CURSOR (reset): Only the contents of the character positions preceding the active presentation position in the presentation component are eligible to be transmitted or transferred. ALL (set): The contents of character positions preceding, following, and at the active presentation position are eligible to be transmitted or transferred. NOTE No control functions are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.18Mode17MnemonicSATMDescriptionSelected area transfer mode SELECT (reset): Only the contents of selected areas are eligible to be transmitted or transferred. ALL (set): The contents of all character positions, irrespective of any explicitly defined selected areas, are eligible to be transmitted or transferred. NOTE No control functions are affected. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.14StatusstandardMode18MnemonicTSMDescriptionTabulation stop mode MULTIPLE (reset): Character tabulation stops in the presentation component are set or cleared in the active line (the line that contains the active presentation position) and in the corresponding character positions of the preceding lines and of the following lines. SINGLE (set): Character tabulation stops in the presentation component are set or cleared in the active line only. NOTE Control functions affected are: CTC, DL, HTS, IL, TBC. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.17StatusstandardMode19MnemonicEBMDescriptionEditing boundary mode The mode EDITING BOUNDARY MODE (EBM) the use of which was already declared deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now been removed. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. F.5.1Statusstandard; obsoleteMode20MnemonicLNMDescriptionLine feed/new line mode The mode LINE FEED/NEW LINE MODE (LF/NL) the use of which was already declared deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now been removed. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. F.5.2 set: Causes a received LF, FF, or VT code to move the cursor to the first column of the next line. RETURN transmits both a CR and a LF code. reset: Causes a received LF, FF, or VT code to move the cursor to the next line in the current column. RETURN transmits a CR code only. Source<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>Statusstandard; obsoleteMode21MnemonicGRCMDescriptionGraphic rendition combination mode REPLACING (reset): Each occurrence of the control function SELECT GRAPHIC RENDITION (SGR) cancels the effect of any preceding occurrence. Any graphic rendition aspects that are to remain unchanged after an occurrence of SGR have to be re-specified by that SGR. CUMULATIVE (set): Each occurrence of the control function SELECT GRAPHIC RENDITION (SGR) causes only those graphic rendition aspects to be changed that are specified by that SGR. All other graphic rendition aspects remain unchanged. NOTE Control function affected is SGR. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.8StatusstandardMode22MnemonicZDMDescriptionZero default mode ZERO (reset): A parameter value of 0 of a control function means the number 0. DEFAULT (set): A parameter value of 0 represents a default parameter value which may be different from 0. NOTE 1 This mode was provided for implementations of the first edition of this Standard which specified that "an empty parameter sub-string or a parameter sub-string which consists of bit combinations 03/00 only represents a default value which depends on the control function". For numeric parameters which are expressed in units established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU) the value 0 could then be specified. For numeric parameters which are effectively repeat counts, a 0 parameter value corresponded to a "no-op". In either instance, non-negative computed numeric parameter values might have been used without treating 0 as a special (unusable) case. Where an explicit parameter value was not used, implementors were urged to omit a parameter value (use an empty parameter sub-string) to imply a default parameter value. Control functions affected are: CBT, CHA, CHT, CNL, CPL, CPR, CUB, CUD, CUF, CUP, CUU, CVT, DCH, DL, ECH, GSM, HPA, HPB, HPR, HVP, ICH, IL, NP, PP, PPA, PPB, PPR, REP, SD, SL, SR, SU, TCC, VPA, VPB, VPR. NOTE 2 Since the publication of the first edition of this Standard in 1976 almost 15 years have expired. The use of this mode should no longer be required because the definition of default parameter values has been changed. SourceECMA-48 5th Ed. F.4.2Statusstandard; deprecatedMode30DescriptionDisplay disable mode Source<URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>StatusWyse private; clashes with ECMA-48Mode31DescriptionStatus line display mode Source<URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>StatusWyse private; clashes with ECMA-48Mode32DescriptionSteady cursor mode Source<URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>StatusWyse private; clashes with ECMA-48Mode33MnemonicWYSTCURMDescriptionWyse steady cursor mode Cursor steady: <esc> [ 33 h Cursor blinking: <esc> [ 33 l (that's a small ell, not eye) Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>StatusWyse private; clashes with ECMA-48Mode34MnemonicWYULCURMDescriptionWyse underline cursor mode Cursor block: <esc> [ 34 l (ell) Cursor line: <esc> [ 34 h Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>StatusWyse private; clashes with ECMA-48Mode35DescriptionWidth change clear mode Source<URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>StatusWyse private; clashes with ECMA-48Mode53Description80/132 column switch set: 132 columns reset: 80 columns Sourcejaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals <7svop9$f9u$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>StatusSiemens 97801-5xx private; clashes with ECMA-48Mode<0DescriptionRoll mode When reset, commands that would move the cursor beyond the 24th line of the screen cause the screen to scroll. When set, such commands cause the cursor to move to the top line. SourceDasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>StatusData General privateMode<1DescriptionBlink mode When set, the blink attribute in CSR will be ignored. SourceDasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>StatusData General privateMode<2DescriptionHorizontal scroll mode set: Horizontal scroll enabled reset: Horizontal scroll disabled SourceDasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>StatusData General privateMode<3DescriptionDG/ANSI mode set: Use ANSI command sequences. reset: Use DG command sequences. SourceDasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>StatusData General privateMode<4DescriptionForms mode When reset, a Local Print command will print all characters. When set, only characters displayed at full intensity will be printed. SourceDasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>StatusData General privateMode<5DescriptionMargins mode In the reset state, editing operations operate irrespective of margins; in the set state, editing operations take place within the margins. The commands affected include: IL, ED, EL, ICH DCH. SourceDasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>StatusData General privateMode=6DescriptionLock display Lock display. When set, this mode causes xwsh to keep its display set to the current location in the retain buffer. Any scrolling activities, line insert/deletes will not affect the retain buffer that is outside of the display. When reset, scrolling off the bottom will move the display to track the bottom of the retain buffer. When the lock is set, the scroll bar is disabled, as well as any extend selection mechanisms that might cause a scroll. The normal mode is in the reset state, but the standard terminfo for iris-ansi causes visual programs to lock the display. SourceIRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)StatusSGI privateMode=9DescriptionEnable visual bell Enable visual bell. When set, xwsh will flash the display when it receives an octal 7 instead of ringing the bell. When reset it asks X to ring the bell. SourceIRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)StatusSGI privateMode=12DescriptionOverlay mode Overlay mode. When set, xwsh moves its display into the overlay planes. When reset, xwsh displays in the default visual. This is no longer functional as of IRIX 4.0. The escape sequence is now ignored. SourceIRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)StatusSGI privateMode?1MnemonicDECCKMDescriptionCursor key mode This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control requences. This mode is only effective when the terminal is in keypad application mode (DECPAM) and the ANSI/VT52 mode (DECANM) is set. Under these conditions, if this mode is reset, the cursor keys will send ANSI cursor control commands. If setm the cursor keys will send application function commands. Source<URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt> DECCKM (default off): When set, the cursor keys send an ESC O prefix, rather than ESC [. SourceLinux console_codes(4)StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?2MnemonicDECANMDescriptionANSI/VT52 Mode This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The reset state causes only VT52 compatible escape sequences to be recognized. The set state causes only ANSI compatible escape sequences to be recognized. Source<URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?3MnemonicDECCOLMDescriptionColumn mode This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The reset state causes an 80 column screen to be used. The set state causes a 132 column screen to be used. Source<URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt> NOTE: When the terminal receives the sequence, the screen is erased and the cursor moves to the home position. This also sets the scrolling region for full screen (24 lines). Source<http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html#S4.6.10> If you change the DECCOLM setting, the terminal: + Sets the left, right, top and bottom scrolling margins to their default positions. + Erases all data in page memory, unless DECNCSM is set; then, the page is not erased. DECCOLM resets vertical split screen mode (DECLRMM) to unavailable. DECCOLM clears data from the status line if the status line is set to host-writable. Source<http://vt100.net/docs/vt520-rm/ek-vt520-rm.pdf>StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?4MnemonicDECSCLMDescriptionScrolling mode This is a private parameter to RM and SM control sequences. The reset state causes scrolls to "jump" instantaneuously one line at a time. The set state causes the scrolls to be "smooth", and scrolls at a maximum rate of six lines/sec. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?5MnemonicDECSCNMDescriptionScreen mode This is a private parameter to RM and SM control sequences. The reset state causes the screen to be black with white characters; the set state causes the screen to be white with black characters. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?6MnemonicDECOMDescriptionOrigin mode This is a private parameter to SM and RM control sequences. The reset state causes the origin (or home position) to be the upper left character position of the screen. Line and column numbers are, therefore, independent of current margin settings. The cursor may be positioned outside the margins with a cursor position (CUP) or horizontal and vertical position (HVP) control. The set state causes the origin to be at the upper left character position within the current margins. Line and column numbers are, therefore, relative to the current margin settings. The cursor cannot be positioned outside of the margins. The cursor is moved to the new home position when this mode is set or reset. Lines and columns are numbered consecutively, with the origin being line 1, column 1. The scroll margins are set using the DECSTBM control sequence. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?7MnemonicDECAWMDescriptionAutowrap mode This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The reset state prevents the cursor from moving when characters are recieved while at the right margin. The set state causes these characters to advance to the next line, causing a scroll up if required and permitted. See MODES, SM, and RM. Source<URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?8MnemonicDECARMDescriptionAuto repeat mode This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The reset state causes no keyboard keys to auto-repeat, the set state causes most of them to. Source<URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?9MnemonicDECINLMDescriptionInterlace mode This is a private parameter to the RM and SM control sequences. The reset state (non-interlace) causes the video processor to display 240 scan lines per frame. The set state causes the video processor to display 480 scan lines per screen. See MODES, RM, and SM. Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT100Mode?9DescriptionX10 mouse reporting Parameters (such as pointer position and button number) for all mouse tracking escape sequences generated by xterm encode numeric parameters in a single character as value+32. For example, ! specifies the value 1. The upper left character position on the terminal is denoted as 1,1. X10 compatibility mode sends an escape sequence only on button press, encoding the location and the mouse button pressed. It is enabled by specifying parameter 9 to DECSET. On button press, xterm sends CSI M CbCxCy (6 characters). Cb is button-1. Cx and Cy are the x and y coor- dinates of the mouse when the button was pressed. SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?10MnemonicDECEDMDescriptionEditing mode set -> Edit reset -> Interactive SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26StatusDEC private; VT131Mode?11MnemonicDECLTMDescriptionLine Transmit mode set -> On reset -> Off SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26StatusDEC private; VT131Mode?13MnemonicDECSCFDMDescriptionSpace compression/field delimiter mode set -> On reset -> Off SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26StatusDEC private; VT131Mode?14MnemonicDECTEMDescriptionTransmit execution mode set -> Immediate reset -> Deferred SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26StatusDEC private; VT131Mode?16MnemonicDECEKEMDescriptionEdit key execution mode set -> Immediate reset -> Deferred SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26StatusDEC private; VT131Mode?18MnemonicDECPFFDescriptionPrint form feed mode set: Selects form feed (FF) as print termination character. The terminal transmits this character to the printer after each print screen operation. reset: Select no termination character. The terminal does not transmit a form feed (FF) to the printer after each print screen operation. Source<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>StatusDEC privateMode?19MnemonicDECPEXDescriptionPrinter extent set -> screen reset -> scrolling region Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>StatusDEC privateMode?24DescriptionPrint density set -> Sets printing to low density operation reset -> Sets printing to high density operation SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE21StatusDEC private, LA12Mode?25MnemonicDECTCEMDescriptionText cursor enable mode set -> visible reset -> invisible Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>StatusDEC privateMode?27MnemonicDECPSPDescriptionProportional spacing set -> sets proportional spacing reset -> clears proportional spacing SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE99StatusDEC private; LQP02Mode?29MnemonicDECPSMDescriptionPitch select mode set -> Sets pitch select mode to current DPS pitches mode reset -> Sets pitch select mode to all pitches mode SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56StatusDEC privateMode?30DescriptionScroll bar mode set -> Show scrollbar reset -> Don't show scrollbar SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusrxvt privateMode?34MnemonicDECRLMDescriptionCursor Right to Left Mode This control function starts/stops the right-to-left cursor direction. Format CSI ? 34 h Set. CSI ? 34 l Reset. Description DECRLM state is common to both the main display and the status line display. The status line is effected only when you set it to Host Writable Status Display in the Display Set-Up screen. DECRLM does not affect column numbering within the line. The first line column is always at the left side of the display window. The last column is always at the right side of the display window. The next character position is defined as the current cursor position minus 1. If the terminal is in Replace mode (IRM is reset), then: * The new character is inserted in the current cursor position. * The cursor moves to the next character position. If terminal is in Insert mode (IRM is set), then: * All characters from the current cursor position to the left margin inclusively are shifted one position towards the left. * The character previously displayed at the left margin disappears. * The new character is inserted in the current cursor position. * The cursor moves to the next character position. The following escape sequences are not affected by the DECRLM setting: ICH - Insert Character DCH - Delete Character ED - Erase in Display EL - Erase in Line DECSED - Selective Erase in Display DECSEL - Selective Erase in Line ECH - Erase Character The following escape sequences are not affected by the DECRLM setting: CUP - Cursor Position HVP - Horizontal and Vertical Position CUF - Cursor Forward CUB - Cursor Backward Notes on DECRLM * The BS control character increases the current cursor position by one, thus moving the cursor on the screen one position to the right. * When new line mode (LNM) is set and the terminal receives one of the control codes LF, VT, or FF, the cursor moves to the last right-most column of the next line. * When control code CR is received, the cursor moves to the last right-most column of the current line. * When control code SUB is received, a number of cancellation activities result within the terminal and the terminal displays an error character, according to the current DECRLM setting. * When control code NEL is received, the cursor moves to the last right-most column of the next line. If the cursor is at the bottom margin, then the page scrolls up. * If auto-wrap is enabled (DECAWM is set), then a graphic character received when the cursor is at column number one appears at the right margin column of the next line. If the cursor is at the end of the scrolling region, then any text already on the page scrolls up. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRLM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?35MnemonicDECHEBMDesription: Hebrew/N-A Keyboard Mapping This control function sets the keyboard mapping to Hebrew/N-A and resets the mapping to North American. Format CSI ? 35 h Set CSI ? 35 l Reset Description When 8-bit characters are selected, DECHEBM switches between the Group 1 and the Group 2 character set mappings. It does not affect the keyboard character set selection or the processing of received characters. When 7-bit characters are selected or the terminal is set to VT100 mode, setting DECHEBM does the following: Switches keyboard map to Group 2. Makes DEC 7-bit Hebrew the keyboard character set. Causes received characters in the range of 60 to 7A (hex) to be displayed using the DEC 7-bit Hebrew when ASCII is designated or invoked and keyboard Group 2 is active. Resetting DECHEBM does the following: Switches keyboard map to Group 1. Makes ASCII the keyboard character set. Causes received characters to be displayed using the graphic left (GL) table of characters in use at the time. Note DECHEBM is only valid when a Hebrew keyboard language is selected. Also it does not convert ASCII or Hebrew characters already on the display. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECHEBM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?35DescriptionShifted key-functions set -> Enable shifted key-functions reset -> Disable shifted key-functions SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusrxvt privateMode?36MnemonicDECHEMDescriptionHebrew encoding set -> Multinational reset -> Hebrew NRC Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>StatusDEC privateMode?38MnemonicDECTEKDescriptionGraphics (Tek) set -> Enter Tektromix mode reset -> [ not possible ] SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05StatusDEC? privateMode?40MnemonicDECCRNLMDescriptionCarriage return/new line mode set -> Enables LF to go with CR reset -> Disables (default) SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107StatusDEC private; printersMode?40DescriptionColumn switch control set -> Allow 80 <-> 132 mode reset -> Disallow 80 <-> 132 mode SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?41Descriptionprint direction set -> Prints from left to right reset -> Prints bidirectionally SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE41StatusDEC private; LA210Mode?41Descriptionmore(1) fix set -> This option indicates that xterm should work around a bug in the more(1) program that causes it to incorrectly display lines that are exactly the width of the window and are followed by a line beginning with a tab (the leading tabs are not displayed). reset -> This option indicates that xterm should not work around the more(1) bug mentioned above. SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05SourceXFree86: xc/programs/xterm/xterm.man,v 3.52 1999/09/27 06:30:25Statusxterm privateMode?42MnemonicDECNRCMDescriptionNational Replacement Character Set Mode Set (National): (7-bit characters) CSI ? 42 h Reset (Multinational): (8-bit characters) CSI ? 42 l Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/chapter4.html>StatusDEC privateMode?43MnemonicDECGEPMDescriptionExpanded/compressed print mode set -> Select an expanded image for a graphics print screen. reset -> Select a compressed image for a graphics print screen. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateMode?44MnemonicDECGPCMDescriptionPrint color/black and white mode set -> Send a color image to the printer for a graphics print screen. reset -> Send a black and white image to the printer for a graphics print screen. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateMode?44DescriptionMargin bell set -> Turn on margin bell reset -> Turn off margin bell SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?45MnemonicDECGPCSDescriptionPrint color syntax set -> Select the RGB color format for a graphics print screen. reset -> Select the HLS color format for a graphics print screen. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateMode?45DescriptionReverse-wraparound mode set -> Reverse-wraparound mode reset -> No reverse-wraparound mode SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?46MnemonicDECGPBM set -> Send the entire graphics image, including the background, to the printer for a graphics print screen. reset -> Send the graphics image, except for the background, to the printer for a graphics print screen. This applies only when the DECGPCM function is set to send a color image. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateMode?46DescriptionLogging mode set -> Start logging (normally disabled by a compile-time option) reset -> Stop logging SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?47MnemonicDECGRPMDescriptionPrint rotated/compressed mode set -> Send a graphics image to the printer rotated 90 degrees. reset -> Send a compressed image to the printer. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateMode?47DescriptionAlternate screen mode set -> Use alternate screen buffer (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource) reset -> Use normal screen buffer SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?51MnemonicDECBWRMDescriptionBlack/white reversal mode SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE123StatusDEC private; LCP01Mode?52MnemonicDECOPMDescriptionOrigin placement mode set -> Places origin to corner of paper reset -> Places origin to corner of printable area (default) SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE110StatusDEC private; LA100, LN03Mode?55MnemonicDECBPMDescriptionBold page mode SourceDEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE123StatusDEC private; LCP01Mode?57MnemonicDECNAKBDescriptionGreek/N-A Keyboard Mapping This control function sets the keyboard mapping to North American and resets the mapping to Greek/N-A. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECNAKB.html>StatusDEC privateMode?58MnemonicDECIPEMDescriptionEnter/Return from IBM ProPrinter Emulation Mode Exit from DEC protocol and interpret subsequent data according to the IBM ProPrinter protocol syntax. This sequence also resets IBM ProPrinter mode to its initial state. Format CSI ? 58 h Set: Enter ProPrinter Emulation mode. CSI ? 58 l Reset: Return from ProPrinter Emulation mode. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECIPEM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?60MnemonicDECHCCMDescriptionHorizontal cursor coupling This control function determines whether the user window pans with the cursor when the cursor moves past the right or left border of the user window. DECHCCM is only useful when the width of the current user window is narrower than the page. The cursor must stay on the current page. set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is coupled to the display for horizontal movement. When the cursor moves past the right or left border of the user window, the window pans to keep the cursor in view. If the cursor moves past the left border of the display, the user window pans to the left and new columns appear at the right border of the window. reset -> Uncouple the cursor from the display. If the cursor is uncoupled from the display and is moved past the right or left border of the user window, the cursor disappears from view. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400Mode?61MnemonicDECVCCMDescriptionVertical cursor coupling This mode determines whether the user window pans with the cursor when the cursor moves past the top or bottom border of the user window. DECVCCM is only useful when the height of the current user window is smaller than the page. The cursor must stay on the current page. set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is coupled to the display for vertical movement. When the cursor moves past the top or bottom border of the user window, the window pans to keep the cursor in view. If the cursor moves past the top of the display, the user window pans up and new lines appear at the top of the screen. reset -> Uncouple the cursor from the display. If the cursor is uncoupled from the display and is moved past the top or bottom border of the user window, the cursor disappears from view. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400Mode?64MnemonicDECPCCM This control function determines if a new page appears in the display when the cursor moves to a new page. DECPCCM is only useful with a multiple-page format. set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is coupled to the display when the cursor moves to a new page. The new page appears in the display to keep the cursor in view. reset -> Uncouple the cursor. If the cursor is uncoupled from the display and is moved to a new page, the cursor disappears from view. SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC private; VT400Mode?66MnemonicDECNKMDescriptionNumeric Keypad Mode This control function works like the DECKPAM and DECKPNM functions. DECNKM is provided mainly for use with the request and report mode (DECRQM/DECRPM) control functions. Available in: VT Level 4 mode only Default: Numeric Format CSI ? 66 h Set: application sequences. CSI ? 66 l Reset: keypad characters. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECNKM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?67MnemonicDECBKMDescriptionBackspace/delete set -> <X| sends backspace reset -> <X| sends delete Source<URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>StatusDEC private; VT320Mode?68MnemonicDECKBUMDescriptionTypewriter or Data Processing Keys You can select whether the main keyboard keys act as data processing keys or typewriter keys by using the keyboard usage mode (DECKBUM) function. Default: Typewriter keys Keyboard Usage Mode (DECKBUM) CSI ? 68 h Set: data processing keys. CSI ? 68 l Reset: typewriter keys. Description If DECKBUM is set, then data processing keys send the characters on the right half of their keycaps. If DECKBUM is reset, then data processing keys send the characters on the left half of their keycaps. Notes on DECKBUM DECKBUM changes the characters that the main keyboard keys send. Make sure you are aware of this change if you use DECKBUM in an application. If you use the North American language, then DECKBUM should always be reset (typewriter). For all other languages, you can use either mode. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECKBUM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?69MnemonicDECLRMMDescriptionLeft Right Margin Mode This control function defines whether or not the set left and right margins (DECSLRM) control function can set margins. Available in: VT Level 4 mode only. Default: DECSLRM cannot set margins. Format CSI ? 69 h Set: DECSLRM can set margins. CSI ? 69 l Reset: DECSLRM cannot set margins. Description When DECLRMM is set, DECSLRM can set the left and right margins. All line attributes currently in page memory for the session are set to single width, single height. The terminal ignores any sequences to change the line attributes to double width or double height (DECDWL or DECDHL). When DECLRMM is reset, DECSLRM cannot set the left and right margins. The margins are set to the page borders for every page. The terminal can process sequences to change the line attributes to double width or double height (DECDWL or DECDHL). Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECLRMM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?73MnemonicDECXRLMDescriptionTransmit Rate Limiting Applications can control the transmit rate limiting feature through the DECXRLM control function. Format CSI ?73 h Set: limited transmit rate. CSI ?73 l Reset: unlimited transmit rate. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECXRLM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?80MnemonicDECSDMDescriptionSixel scrolling set -> enable sixel scrolling (screen scrolls if sixel graphics hit bottom) reset -> disable sixel scrolling SourceReflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0StatusDEC privateMode?81Mnemomic: DECKPM DescriptionKey Position Mode This control function selects whether the keyboard sends character codes or key position reports to the host. DECKPM lets new applications take full control of the keyboard including single shifts, locking shifts, and compose character processing. Default: Send character codes Format CSI ? 81 h Set: send key position reports. CSI ? 81 l Reset: send character codes. Description If the DECKPM function is set, then all keyboard keys send extended reports that include the key position and the state of modifier keys when pressed. A modifier key is pressed in combination with another key to modify the code sent by that key. The Ctrl key is a modifier key. If the DECKPM function is reset, then the keyboard keys send character codes. Note on DECKPM DECKPM only affects keyboard input; it does not affect how the terminal interprets data from the host. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECKPM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?95Mnemomic: DECNCSM DescriptionNo clear screen on column change Set/reset the following condition: do not clear the screen whenever the column mode changes. Format CSI ? 95 h Set: do not clear screen when column mode changes. CSI ? 95 l Reset: clear the screen when column mode changes. Description When enabled, a column mode change (either through Set-Up or by the escape sequence DECCOLM) does not clear the screen. When disabled, the column mode change clears the screen as a side effect. This sequence does not affect the column mode change caused by the sequence, DECSCPP. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECNCSM.html>StatusDEC private; VT510Mode?96MnemonicDECRLCMDescriptionRight-to-left copy Perform a copy/paste from right-to-left or from left-to-right. Default: Disable right-to-left-copy. Format CSI ? 96 h Enable right-to-left copy. CSI / 96 l Disable right-to-left copy (default). Description When operating in Copy/Paste, you can paste the copied text according to the direction assigned in this command sequence. If right-to-left copy is selected, then the text is stored in the paste buffer starting from right-to-left. For example if "ABCD" is to be copied right-to-left, when a Paste key is pressed, the string is saved in the paste buffer as "DCBA." Thus, the text is displayed as "DCBA". Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECRLCM.html>StatusDEC private; VT510Mode?97MnemonicDECCRTSMDescriptionCRT Save Mode Enable or disable CRT saver. Default: Enable CRT saver. Format CSI ? 97 h Set: enable CRT saver. CSI ? 97 l Reset: disable CRT saver. Description If CRT saver is enabled and the terminal is inactive for 30 minutes (no keyboard activity or input from a host computer), then the monitor screen goes blank to prolong the life of the CRT. No data is lost when CRT saver is active. Keyboard activity or input from the host computer re-activates the monitor. When the monitor goes blank, the keyboard LEDs flash. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECCRTSM.html>StatusDEC private; VT510Mode?98MnemonicDECARSMDescriptionAuto resize mode Enable or disable changing the lines per screen automatically when the page arrangement changes. Default: Auto resize disabled Format CSI ? 98 h Set: enable auto resize. CSI ? 98 l Reset: disable auto resize. Description When Auto Resize is enabled, the number of Lines/Screen changes automatically each time the page arrangement changes. Auto Resize and Number of lines per screen are user features that can be locked from being redefined by the host if the User Feature Lock in Set-Up is enabled. The following table indicates how the lines/screen changes when the page size changes, assuming Auto Resize is set. Page size Lines/Screen 24 26 (24 data lines, 1 status line, 1 blank line) 25 26 (25 data lines, 1 status line) 36 42 (36 data lines, 1 status line, 5 blank lines) 41 42 (41 data lines, 1 status line) 42 42 (42 data lines, no status line) 48 53 (48 data lines, 1 status line, 4 blank lines) 52 53 (52 data lines, 1 status line) 53 53 (53 data lines, 0 status line) 72 53 (53 data lines, 0 status line) Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECARSM.html>StatusDEC private; VT510Mode?99MnemonicDECMCMDescriptionModem Control Mode Enables (set) or disables (reset) modem control. Format CSI ? 99 h Enable Modem Control CSI ? 99 l Disable modem control - default Description When enabled for the Comm2 connector, no data is transmitted or received unless DSR is asserted. Assertion of DSR alone is sufficient to establish a connection. Loss of DSR causes a disconnect. When DSR is not asserted, no data is transmitted, and incoming receive data is ignored. When DSR is again asserted, the communications state is re-initialized to prepare for the new connection. When enabled for the Comm1 (25-pin EIA) connector, the terminal does not transmit unless CTS is asserted. If a connection has not been established (DSR is deasserted), RLSD is ignored. Transmission and reception may still occur if CTS is asserted. Assertion of CTS with DSR and RLSD asserted indicates a connection has been established. (CTS is checked last.) When Modem Control is disabled, transmission and reception occur regardless of the state of the modem control signal. The terminal communicates using data leads only. DTR and RTS are always asserted except during an operator initiated disconnect sequence, or the input buffer reaches the 64-byte threshold when DTR flow control scheme is selected. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECMCM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?100MnemonicDECAAMDescriptionAuto answerback mode Selects whether the terminal automatically sends (enables) or does not send (disables) the answerback message to the host computer after a communication line connection. Default: Auto answerback disabled. Format CSI ? 100 h Set: enables auto answerback. CSI ? 100 l Reset: disables auto answerback. Description When modem control is enabled, the answerback message is sent 500 ms after the connection is made. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECAAM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?101MnemonicDECCANSMDescriptionConceal Answerback Message Mode Conceal the answerback message. Default: Answerback message is not concealed Format CSI ? 101 h Conceal answerback message CSI ? 101 l Answerback message is not concealed Description Setting Function Not concealed The answerback message is visible in Set-Up. Concealed The text "concealed" replaces the answerback message. The answerback message cannot be set back to "not concealed" either through a host control function or Set-Up. Only entering a new message returns this field to "not concealed." If the user or host requests the terminal to reset to the default setting (answerback message not concealed (CSI ? 101 l)) when the answerback message is set to "concealed," then the terminal will not reset the answerback message to "not concealed." Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECCANSM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?102MnemonicDECNULMDescriptionIgnoring Null Mode Allow Null (NUL) characters to be ignored or buffered at printer port only. Format CSI ? 102 h Set: ignore NUL (default). CSI ? 102 l Reset: accept NUL. Description When set, the NUL character is discarded on receipt from the host. When reset, the NUL character is passed through to the printer. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECNULM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?103MnemonicDECHDPXMDescriptionHalf-Duplex Mode Enables half-/full-duplex communication. Format CSI ? 103 h Set to half-duplex mode. CSI ? 103 l Set to full-duplex mode. Description Full-duplex mode allows simultaneously two-way communication; half-duplex mode is limited to one-way communication at any given time. Half-duplex mode is available only in an RS232 line. Refer to Chapter 9 for details about half-duplex mode communication protocol. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECCANSM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?104MnemonicDECESKMDescriptionEnable Secondary Keyboard Language Mode Select a secondary or primary keyboard language. Format CSI ? 104 h Secondary keyboard mapping. CSI ? 104 l Primary keyboard mapping. Description When enabled, a secondary keyboard mapping replaces the primary keyboard mapping. To use the secondary keyboard mapping, a secondary keyboard language has to be defined. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/chapter8.html>StatusDEC privateMode?106MnemonicDECOSCNMDescriptionOverscan Mode Sets or resets overscan mode. Default: Overscan disabled (reset). Format CSI ? 106 h Enable overscan CSI ? 106 l Disable overscan (Default) Description When set, overscan is enabled. Overscan and 72 Hz refresh rate cannot co-exist when the terminal is set to 42 or 53 lines per screen. Refer to DECSNLS--Set Lines Per Screen for details. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECOM.html>StatusDEC privateMode?108MnemonicDECNUMLKDesription: Num Lock Mode DECNUMLK controls the state of the keyboard's Num Lock key. Format CSI ? 108 h Set: num lock mode. CSI ? 108 l Reset: num lock mode. Mode?109MnemonicDECCAPSLKDescriptionCaps Lock Mode DECCAPSLK controls the state of the [Caps Lock] key on the PC keyboard. Format CSI ? 109 h Set: caps lock mode. CSI ? 109 l Reset: caps lock mode. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECCAPSLK.html>StatusDEC privateMode?110MnemonicDECKLHIMDescriptionKeyboard LED's Host Indicator Mode DECKLHIM controls the state of the keyboard LED's host indicator mode. Default: Reset. Format CSI ? 110 h Set: keyboard LED's host indicator mode. CSI ? 110 l Reset: keyboard LED's host indicator mode. Description DECLL controls keyboard LEDs independently of any keyboard state. The use of LEDs for this purpose conflicts with their use as keyboard state indicators. DECKLHIM selects a mode of how the keyboard LEDs are to be used: as keyboard indicators; or host indicators. If host indicators is selected, then the DECLL sequence can be used to control the keyboard LEDs. For DECLL to function, DECKLHIM must be set. See DECLL for the implications of using DECLL to control the keyboard LEDs independently of any keyboard state. Source<https://vt100.net/docs/vt510-rm/DECCAPSLK.html>StatusDEC privateMode?1000DescriptionX11 normal mouse tracking Parameters (such as pointer position and button number) for all mouse tracking escape sequences generated by xterm encode numeric parameters in a single character as value+32. For example, ! specifies the value 1. The upper left character position on the terminal is denoted as 1,1. Normal tracking mode sends an escape sequence on both button press and release. Modifier key (shift, ctrl, meta) information is also sent. It is enabled by specifying parameter 1000 to DECSET. On button press or release, xterm sends CSI M CbCxCy. The low two bits of Cb encode button information: 0=MB1 pressed, 1=MB2 pressed, 2=MB3 pressed, 3=release. The upper bits encode the modifiers which were down when the button was pressed and are added together. 4=Shift, 8=Meta, 16=Control. Cx and Cy are the x and y coordinates of the mouse event. The upper left corner is (1,1). SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1001DescriptionX11 hilite mouse tracking Mouse hilite tracking notifies a program of a button press, receives a range of lines from the program, highlights the region covered by the mouse within that range until button release, and then sends the program the release coordinates. It is enabled by specifying parameter 1001 to DECSET. Highlighting is performed only for button 1, though other but- ton events can be received. Warning: use of this mode requires a coop- erating program or it will hang xterm. On button press, the same infor- mation as for normal tracking is generated; xterm then waits for the program to send mouse tracking information. All X events are ignored until the proper escape sequence is received from the pty: CSI Ps ; Ps ; Ps ; Ps ; Ps T . The parameters are func, startx, starty, firstrow, and lastrow. func is non-zero to initiate hilite tracking and zero to abort. startx and starty give the starting x and y location for the highlighted region. The ending location tracks the mouse, but will never be above row firstrow and will always be above row lastrow. (The top of the screen is row 1.) When the button is released, xterm reports the ending position one of two ways: if the start and end coordinates are valid text locations: CSI t CxCy. If either coordinate is past the end of the line: CSI T CxCyCxCyCxCy. The parameters are startx, starty, endx, endy, mousex, and mousey. startx, starty, endx, and endy give the starting and ending character positions of the region. mousex and mousey give the location of the mouse at button up, which may not be over a character. SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1002DescriptionX11 button-event mouse tracking Button-event tracking is essentially the same as normal tracking, but xterm also reports button-motion events. Motion events are reported only if the mouse pointer has moved to a different character cell. It is enabled by specifying parameter 1002 to DECSET. On button press or release, xterm sends the same codes used by normal tracking mode. On button-motion events, xterm adds 4 to the event code (the third charac- ter, Cb). The low two bits of the event code encode the button informa- tion. The third bit is set to indicate motion. Additional bits specify modifier keys as in normal mode. For example, motion into cell x,y with button 1 down is reported as CSI M @ CxCy. ( @ = 32 + 0 (button 1) + 32 (motion indicator) ). Similarly, motion with button 3 down is reported as CSI M B CxCy. ( B = 32 + 2 (button 3) + 32 (motion indica- tor) ). SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1003DescriptionX11 any-event mouse tracking Any-event mode is the same as button-event mode, except that all motion events are reported instead of just those that enter a new character cell. It is enabled by specifying 1003 to DECSET. SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1010DescriptionScroll to bottom on tty output set -> Scroll to bottom on tty output reset -> Don't scroll to bottom on tty output SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusrxvt privateMode?1011DescriptionScroll to bottom on key press set -> Scroll to bottom on key press reset -> Don't scroll to bottom on key press SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusrxvt privateMode?1035DescriptionSpecial modifiers set -> Enable special modifiers for Alt and NumLock keys reset -> Disable special modifiers for Alt and NumLock keys SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1047 set -> Use alternate screen buffer (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource) reset -> Use Normal Screen Buffer, clearing screen first if in the Alternate Screen (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource) SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1048 set -> Save cursor as in DECSC (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource) reset -> Restore cursor as in DECRC (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource) SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1049 set -> Save cursor as in DECSC and use Alternate Screen Buffer, clearing it first (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource) reset -> Use Normal Screen Buffer and restore cursor as in DECRC (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource) SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1051DescriptionSun function-key mode SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1052DescriptionHP function-key mode SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm privateMode?1061DescriptionSun/PC keyboard mode SourceXFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05Statusxterm private